2013 Dodge Journey Owner's Manual
Upcoming SlideShare
Loading in...5
×
 

2013 Dodge Journey Owner's Manual

on

  • 6,324 views

2013 Dodge Journey Owner's Manual, Naples Dodge Chrysler Jeep Ram, Naples, Bonita Springs, Fort Myers, Florida. www.naplesdodge.com

2013 Dodge Journey Owner's Manual, Naples Dodge Chrysler Jeep Ram, Naples, Bonita Springs, Fort Myers, Florida. www.naplesdodge.com

Statistics

Views

Total Views
6,324
Views on SlideShare
6,324
Embed Views
0

Actions

Likes
0
Downloads
7
Comments
0

0 Embeds 0

No embeds

Accessibility

Categories

Upload Details

Uploaded via as Adobe PDF

Usage Rights

© All Rights Reserved

Report content

Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
  • Full Name Full Name Comment goes here.
    Are you sure you want to
    Your message goes here
    Processing…
Post Comment
Edit your comment

2013 Dodge Journey Owner's Manual 2013 Dodge Journey Owner's Manual Presentation Transcript

  • 2013OWNER’S MANUAL Journey
  • VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation ofChrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or optionalname Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available orDRIVING AND ALCOHOL were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard anyDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of features and equipment described in this manual that areaccidents. not on this vehicle.Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with bloodalcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes indrinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking design and specifications, and/or make additions to ordriver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. improvements to its products without imposing any obliga- tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC drinking. Never drink and then drive.
  • SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 910 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 10
  • INTRODUCTION 1CONTENTSⅥ INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Ⅵ VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6Ⅵ HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Ⅵ VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7Ⅵ WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
  • 4 INTRODUCTIONINTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group nicians and genuine MOPAR௡ parts, and cares aboutLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision your satisfaction.workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - allessentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUALThis Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which sectiontance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on thecustomer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions andread these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manualassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of theshould be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughouting and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
  • INTRODUCTION 5 1
  • 6 INTRODUCTIONWARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-erating procedures that could result in a collision orbodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If youdo not read this entire Owners Manual, you may missimportant information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-tions.VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the leftfront corner of the instrument panel and is visible from VIN Locationoutside of the vehicle through the windshield. Thisnumber also appears stamped on the right front door sillunder the sill moulding and printed on the AutomobileInformation Disclosure Label affixed to a window onyour vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
  • INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS 1 WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.Stamped VIN Location
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLECONTENTS 2Ⅵ A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Ⅵ VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19Ⅵ SENTRY KEY௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Ⅵ ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Ⅵ REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .23
  • 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Ⅵ WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .24 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Ⅵ LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Ⅵ REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — Ⅵ OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .53Ⅵ DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .54 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 (ALR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 ▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Ⅵ KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 ▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .56
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 (BeltAlert௡) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Ⅵ ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .102▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .61 Ⅵ SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 2▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .65 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .69 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
  • 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEA WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminateYour vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, andconsists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during starttransmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN). RUN will illuminate.Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change withThis vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) mayfeature, refer to “Starting Procedure” in “Starting And have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back upOperating” for further information. method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of theKeyless Ignition Node (KIN) Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button andThis feature allows the driver to operate the ignition push to operate the ignition switch.switch with the push of a button, as long as the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passengercompartment.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob. 2 The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park- ing. Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)1 — OFF2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)3 — ON/RUN
  • 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Ignition Or Accessory On Messageon the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC orand then pull the key out with your other hand. ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster. NOTE: With the Uconnect Touch™ system, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Emergency Key RemovalNOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency keyinto the lock cylinders with either side up.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking • Do not leave children or animals inside parked brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re- vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. 2 move the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with CAUTION! access to an unlocked vehicle.• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle dren should be warned not to touch the parking unattended. brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, and SENTRY KEYா do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win- ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked (Continued) or unlocked.
  • 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry CAUTION!(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and aRF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer system is not compat-Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the ible with some after-market remote starting systems.vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Use of these systems may result in vehicle startingAfter cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the problems and loss of security protection.Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle havebulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it been programmed to the vehicle electronics.indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. Inaddition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, Replacement Keysit indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to thethe engine. Either of these conditions will result in the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate theengine being shut off after two seconds. vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, itIf the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible by an authorized dealer.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 • If a programmed Key Fob is lost, see your authorized CAUTION! dealer to have all remaining Key Fobs erased from the Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and system’s memory. This will prevent the lost Key Fobs lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. from starting your vehicle. The remaining Keys Fobs 2 must then be reprogrammed.At the time of purchase, the original owner is providedwith a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Customer Key ProgrammingKeep the PIN in a secure location. This number is Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may berequired for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. performed at an authorized dealer.Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a General Informationblank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob The Sentry Key௡ system complies with FCC rules Part 15is one that has never been programmed. and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:NOTE: • This device may not cause harmful interference.• When having the Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho- • This device must accept any interference that may be rized dealer. received, including interference that may cause unde- sired operation.
  • 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEVEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED To Arm The SystemThe Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the Keyless 1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer toEnter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button for unauthorized opera- ЉStarting ProceduresЉ in ЉStarting And OperatingЉ fortion. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior further information).switches for door locks are disabled. If something trig-gers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,the following audible and visible signals: the horn will make sure the vehicle ignition system is ЉOFFЉ.pulse, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in make sure the vehicle ignition system is ЉOFFЉ and thethe instrument cluster will flash. key is physically removed from the ignition.Rearming Of The System 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock theIf something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to vehicle:disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn • Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switchoff after 3 minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after with the driver and/or passenger door open.15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle SecurityAlarm will rearm itself. • Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19exterior zone (refer to ЉKeyless Enter-N-Go™Љ in ЉThings • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFFTo Know Before Starting Your VehicleЉ for further infor- position.mation). • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button 2(RKE) transmitter. (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle). • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-3. If any doors are open, close them. Go™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch andTo Disarm The System turn the key to the ON position.The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of NOTE:the following methods: • The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Entry (RKE) transmitter. Vehicle Security Alarm.• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior valid Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. door handle (if equipped, refer to ЉKeyless Enter-N- Go™Љ in ЉThings To Know Before Starting Your Ve- The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your hicleЉ for further information). vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
  • 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEsystem will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- Security System Manual Overrideously described arming sequences has occurred, the The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock theVehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether doors using the manual door lock plunger.you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicleand open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, ILLUMINATED ENTRYdisarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. The courtesy lights will turn on when you use theIf the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock thebecomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will doors or open any door or liftgate.remain armed when the battery is reconnected; theexterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this This feature also turns on the approach lighting in theoccurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-Tamper Alert ther information.If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30your absence, the horn will sound three times and the seconds or they will immediately fade to off once theexterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFFVehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering. position.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21NOTE: NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour- ter buttons for all RKE transmitters. tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the ЉDome ONЉ position (extreme top position). 2• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,open the liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm fromdistances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using ahand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKEtransmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle toactivate the system. Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
  • 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Flash Lights With Remote KeyPress and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash whentransmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To changeturn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings”signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furtherIf the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to information.“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before Turn Headlights On With Remote Key UnlockStarting Your Vehicle” for further information. This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 secondsRemote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.Press The time for this feature is programmable on vehiclesThis feature lets you program the system to unlock either equipped through Uconnect Touch™. To change thethe driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” inUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in formation.“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-formation.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23To Lock The Doors And Liftgate second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, thePress and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights willter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights turn on. 2will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge thesignal. The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button aIf the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before (24 km/h) or greater.Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. NOTE:Sound Horn With Remote Key LockThis feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors • The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignitionare locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while theturned on or turned off. To change the current setting, Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lightsrefer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding and horn will remain on.Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from theUsing The Panic Alarm vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emittedTo turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold by the system.the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
  • 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEProgramming Additional Transmitters 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halvesProgramming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damageperformed at an authorized dealer. the seal during removal.Transmitter Battery ReplacementThe recommended replacement battery is one CR2032battery.NOTE:• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your Separating RKE Transmitter Case other hand.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 253. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over • This device must accept any interference received, (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a including interference that may cause undesired op- solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the eration. battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign 2 NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery proved by the party responsible for compliance could clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal with rubbing alcohol. distance, check for these two conditions:4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two 1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected halves together. life of the battery is a minimum of three years.General Information 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CBThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and radios.RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions:• This device may not cause harmful interference.
  • 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEREMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • Doors closed • Hood closed This system uses the Key Fob with Remote • Liftgate closed Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle • HAZARD switch off while still maintaining security. The system has • BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m). • Battery at an acceptable charge levelNOTE: • RKE PANIC button not pressed.• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. • System not disabled from previous remote start event• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may • Vehicle theft alarm not active reduce this range. • Ignition in OFF positionHow To Use Remote StartAll of the following conditions must be met before theengine will remote start:• Shift lever in PARK
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar WARNING! • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- • Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar 2 oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in- jury or death when inhaled. The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to the ON/RUN position. away from children. Operation of the Remote Start To Enter Remote Start Mode System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. Press and release the REMOTE START buttonRemote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parkingThe following messages will display in the EVIC if the lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (ifvehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema- programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicleturely: will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
  • 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. Start request.• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Remote Start mode. Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the• For security, power window and power sunroof op- UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if in the Remote Start mode. equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two press and release the START/STOP button. 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before the EVIC until you push the START button. you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. Remote Start Comfort Systems — If EquippedTo Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving TheVehicle When remote start is activated, the driver heated seat feature will automatically turn on in cold weather. ThisPress and release the REMOTE START button one time or feature will stay on through the duration of remote start orallow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. until the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated anddeactivated through the Uconnect Touch™ system. Formore information on Remote Start Comfort System op-eration refer to “Uconnect Touch™ system/Uconnect 2Touch™ Settings — Customer Programmable Features”in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.DOOR LOCKSManual Door LocksTo lock each door, push the door lock knob on each doortrim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull theinside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear Manual Door Lock Knobdoors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,upward. the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the liftgate.
  • 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Power Door Locks WARNING! A power door lock switch is on each front door trim• For personal security and safety in the event of a panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as liftgate. well as when you park and leave the vehicle.• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsu- pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause se- vere personal injuries or death.• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition in the in the ACC or RUN position. A child could Power Door Lock Switch Location operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Automatic Unlock Doors On ExitKeyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles withinformation, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things power door locks if:To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. 2 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-If you press the power door lock switch while the Key abled.Fob is in the vehicle, and any front door is open, thepower locks will not operate. This prevents you from 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speedaccidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Remov- returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to 3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the LOCKor ACC position, a chime will sound as a reminder to 4. Any vehicle door is opened.remove the Key Fob. 5. The doors were not previously unlocked.Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped 6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).When enabled, the door locks will lock automaticallywhen the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forauthorized dealer . Please see your authorized dealer for further information.service.
  • 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit featurein accordance with local laws.Child-Protection Door Lock System — RearDoorsTo provide a safer environment for small children ridingin the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with aChild-Protection Door Lock system.To Engage The Child-Protection Door Lock System1. Open the rear door.2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the Child-Protection Door Lock Location child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened 2 from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. NOTE: • After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys- tem, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position. Child-Protection Door Lock Function3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door. • For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the lock knob up to the UNLOCK position, roll down theNOTE: When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is window, and open the door with the outside doorengaged, the door can be opened only by using the handle.outside door handle even though the inside door lock isin the unlocked position.
  • 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.System NOTE: After disengaging the Child-Protection Door1. Open the rear door. Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK position. KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons. NOTE: • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Child-Protection Door Lock Function
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re- sponse time. 2• If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the theft alarm.To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handledoor handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmedThe interior door panel lock knob will raise when the all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’sdoor is unlocked. front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
  • 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo Unlock From The Passenger Side: To Enter The LiftgateWith a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the button underneath the leftpassenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the side of the accent bar, which is located on the liftgateliftgate automatically. below the glass, to lock or unlock the vehicle.NOTE: All doors and the liftgate will unlock when thefront passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of thedriver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock DriverDoor 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). Liftgate Unlock/Lock Button
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE To Lock The Vehicle’s DoorsTransmitter In Vehicle The front door handles have LOCK buttons located onTo minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a the outside of the handles.Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the 2Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic doorunlock feature which will function if the ignition switchis in the OFF position.If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panelswitch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doorshave been closed the vehicle checks the inside andoutside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKEtransmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKEtransmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no othervalid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically Outside Door Handle Lock Buttonunlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the PassiveEntry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
  • 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEWith one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters • If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect Touch™within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door System, the key protection described in ЉPreventinghandle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitterfour doors and the liftgate. in VehicleЉ remains active/functional.NOTE: • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead.• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by vehicle’s interior door panel. pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39WINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.Power Windows The window controls will operate when the ignition is inThe window controls on the driver’s door trim panel the ON/RUN or ACC position.control all of the door windows. 2 NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect Touch™, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. WARNING! Never leave children in a vehicle with the Key Fob. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can be- come entrapped by the windows while operating the Power Window Switches power window switches. Such entrapment may re- sult in serious injury or death.
  • 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEAuto-Down Feature To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.The driver’s power window switch has an Auto-downfeature. Press the window switch past the first detent, To close the window part way, pull the window switchrelease, and the window will go down automatically. up to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.To open the window part way, press the window switchto the first detent and release it when you want the NOTE:window to stop. • If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-To stop the window from going all the way down during closure, it will reverse direction and then go backthe Auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window.Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection(for versions/markets, where provided) • Any impact due to rough road conditions may triggerOn some models, the driver’s and front passenger’s the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-power window switch has an Auto-up feature. Pull the closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to thewindow switch up to the second detent, release, and the first detent and hold to close window manually.window will go up automatically.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Reset WARNING! It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate theThere is no anti-pinch protection when the window Auto Up feature. To do so, perform the following proce-is almost closed. To avoid personal injury, be sure to dure: 2clear your arms, hands, fingers, and objects from thewindow path before closing the window. Such en- 1. Pull the window switch up to close the windowtrapment may result in serious injury. completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed. 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.
  • 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEWindow Lockout SwitchThe window lockout switch on the driver’s door trimpanel allows you to disable the window control on therear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,press and release the window lockout button (setting it inthe down position). To enable the window controls, pressand release the window lockout button again (setting it inthe up position). Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- NOTE: The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked withrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels orthe rear windows open, then open the front and rear the door lock cylinder on the driver’s door.windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the 2 To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the handle andbuffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun- pull the liftgate toward you. Gas props will raise androof opening to minimize the buffeting. support the liftgate in the open position.LIFTGATEThe liftgate can be unlocked or locked pressing theUNLOCK or LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter, the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (PassiveEntry) or by activating the power door lock switchlocated on either front door trim panel.For further information on Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Pas-sive Entry), refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “ThingsTo Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. Liftgate Release
  • 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Because the gas pressure drops with tempera- OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSture, it may be necessary to assist the props when Some of the most important safety features in youropening the liftgate in cold weather. vehicle are the restraint systems: WARNING! • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. These fumes could • Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front injure you and your passengers. Keep the liftgate passenger closed when you are operating the vehicle. • Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, on top of the front seats (integrated into the head make sure that all windows are closed, and the restraint) blower switch on the climate control is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) that span the front, second, and third row seating for the driver and passengers seated next to a window • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized wheel seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants infant and child restraint systems. For more information 2• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for enhance occupant protection by managing occupant CHildren (LATCH). energy during an impact event NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and second inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different row center) include Automatic Locking Retractors rates of inflation based on several factors, including the (ALRs) or a cinching latch plate, or both, which lock severity and type of collision. the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat — if equippedPlease pay close attention to the information in thissection. It tells you how to use your restraint systemproperly, to keep you and your passengers as safe aspossible.
  • 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEHere are some simple steps you can take to minimize the children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or underrisk of harm from a deploying air bag: their arm.1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child buckled up in a rear seat. seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. WARNING! (Refer to “Child Restraints”) Infants in rear facing child restraints should never You should read the instructions provided with your ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can 2. All occupants should always wear their lap and cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi- shoulder belts properly. tion. 3. The driver and front passenger seats should beChildren that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat moved back as far as practical to allow the Advancedbelt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be Front Air Bags room to inflate.secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt- 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If yourpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, thechild restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should side air bags will inflate forcefully into the spaceride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow between you and the door.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 475. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be WARNING! (Continued) modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument under ؆If You Need Assistance؆. panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air 2 WARNING! Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more instrument panel. severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In (SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the Always wear your seat belts even though you have door or window. Sit upright in the center of the air bags. seat. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer (Continued) much greater injuries if you are not properly buck- led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
  • 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEBuckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of theon short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver vehicle or being thrown out.and cause a collision that includes you. This can happenfar away from home or on your own street. WARNING!Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside orcan reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding inof the worst injuries happen when people are thrown these areas are more likely to be seriously injuredfrom the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of or killed.ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the • Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourinside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbe belted at all times. belts.Lap/Shoulder Belts • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seatcombination lap/shoulder belts. belts are designed to go around the large bones ofThe belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during your body. These are the strongest parts of yourvery sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the body and can take the forces of a collision best.shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under (Continued)normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 2. The seat belt latch plate is located on the pillar near the WARNING! (Continued) back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as your injuries in a collision much worse. You might necessary to make the belt go around your lap. suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out 2 of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the front seat. Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
  • 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch WARNING! plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” • A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop- erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. (Continued) Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your WARNING! (Continued) abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck 2 belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause inter- belt in a collision. nal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a colli- sion.• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. Removing Slack From Belt
  • 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. WARNING! The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi- • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as WARNING! possible and keep it snug. • A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi- not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt ately and have it fixed. assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac- etc.). tor will withdraw any slack in the belt. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat, the shoul- der belt can be adjusted upward or downward to posi- tion the belt away from your neck. Push and fully
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53depress the button above the webbing to release the you will prefer a higher position. When you release theanchorage, then move it up or down to the position that anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure thatfits you best. it is locked in position. In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to 2 position the belt away from your neck. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. Adjusting Upper Shoulder BeltAs a guide, if you are shorter than average you will 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
  • 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the If the passenger seating position is equipped with an folded webbing. ALR and is being used for normal usage:Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to notThe seat belts in the passenger seating positions are activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear aequipped an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbingcinching latch plate which are used to secure a child to retract completely in this case and then carefully pullrestraint system. For additional information, refer to out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-“Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide theunder the “Child Restraints” section. The chart below latch plate into the buckle until you hear a Љclick.Љdefines the type of feature for each seating position. Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Driver Center Passenger Equipped First Row N/A N/A ALR In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre- Second Row ALR Cinch ALR locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in Third Row ALR N/A ALR the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail- able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-• N/A — Not Applicable tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 WARNING!years old and under should always be properly re-strained in the rear seat. • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced ifHow To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor 2 (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. working properly when checked according to the2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until procedures in the Service Manual. the entire belt is extracted. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is Energy Management Feature now in the Automatic Locking Mode. This vehicle has a safety belt system with an EnergyHow To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-onUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it collision.to retract completely to disengage the Automatic LockingMode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that islocking mode. designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
  • 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESeat Belt Pretensioners Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)The seat belts for both front seating positions are These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readilyremove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-These devices may improve the performance of the seat tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be splitbelt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant in two halves, with the front half being soft foam andearly in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- trim, the back half being decorative plastic.pants, including those in child restraints. How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) WorkNOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determinesbelt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be whether the severity, or type of rear impact will requireworn snugly and positioned properly. the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rearThe pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- impact requires deployment, both the driver and frontstraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner ora deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front halfof the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gapbetween the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the 2extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger incertain types of rear impacts.NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or maynot deploy in the event of a front or side impact.However if during a front impact, a secondary rearimpact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-ity and type of the impact. Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components 1 — Head Restraint Front Half 3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Soft Foam and Trim) (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover) 2 — Seatback 4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
  • 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat. CAUTION! All occupants, including the driver, should not oper- ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting andpositioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting ActiveHead Restraints” in “Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle”.Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR) Hand Positioning Points On AHRIf the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR atyou must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and a comfortable position.front passenger seat. You can recognize when the ActiveHead Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they 3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of thehave moved forward (as shown in step three of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.resetting procedure).
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 21 — Downward Movement 3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism2 — Rearward Movement
  • 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints into the back decorative plastic half. checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlertா) BeltAlert௡ is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger (if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert௡) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened. The BeltAlert௡ warning sequence begins after the vehicle AHR In Reset Position speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat BeltNOTE: Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer. duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts NOTE: Although BeltAlert௡ has been deactivated, theare fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminatepants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped withunbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph BeltAlert௡) seat belt remains unfastened. 2(8 km/h), BeltAlert௡ will provide both audio and visual Seat Belts And Pregnant Womennotification. We recommend that pregnant women use the seat beltsThe front passenger seat BeltAlert௡ is not active when the throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe isfront passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert௡ may be the best way to keep the baby safe.triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the frontpassenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the beltequipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are Keep the belt low so that it does not come across thesecured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.BeltAlert௡ can be enabled or disabled by your authorizeddealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac-tivating BeltAlert௡.
  • 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESeat Belt Extender Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air BagsIf a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both thewhen the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seatequipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Airdealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. Theextender should be used only if the existing belt is not passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in thelong enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- instrument panel, above the glove compartment. Thetender and store it. words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental WARNING! Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi- tions. Remove and store the extender when not needed.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags. The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator 2 design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors, including the severity and type of collision. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front1 — Driver And Passenger 2 — Knee Bolster passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whetherAdvanced Front Air Bags the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The3 — Supplemental Driver Side seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of theKnee Air Bag Advanced Front Air Bags. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
  • 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEand rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC • Air Bag Warning Lightair bags are located above the side windows and their • Steering Wheel and Columncovers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG. • Instrument PanelThis vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The SABs are marked with • Driver Side Knee Air Bagan air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front • Knee Impact Bolster (for versions/markets, whereseats. provided)NOTE: • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag but they will open during air bag deployment. • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) authorized dealer immediately. • Front and Side Impact SensorsAir Bag System Components • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle SwitchYour vehicle may be equipped with the following air bagsystem components:• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65Advanced Front Air Bag Features WARNING!The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistagedriver and front passenger air bags. This system provides • No objects should be placed over or near the airoutput appropriate to the severity and type of collision as bag on the instrument panel, because any such 2determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in awhich may receive information from the front impact collision severe enough to cause the air bag tosensors. inflate. • Do not put anything on or around the air bagThe first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an covers or attempt to open them manually. You mayimpact that requires air bag deployment. This low output damage the air bags and you could be injuredis used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is because the air bags may no longer be functional.used for more severe collisions. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
  • 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESupplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between theSAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bagoccupant during a side impact. The Supplemental Seat- deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right airMounted Side Air Bag is marked with an air bag labelsewn into the outboard side of the front seats. bag only. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll- over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down- ward, covering both windows on the impact side. Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. • Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or 2 killed. The system includes side impact sensors that are cali- brated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection. Supplemental Side Curtain Air BagsNOTE:• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy.
  • 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag WARNING! The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do enhanced protection and works together with the Driver not have any accessory items installed which will Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact. alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma- Knee Impact Bolsters nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the front passenger, and position the front occupant for the vehicle for any reason. best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front (SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee high enough to block the location of the SABIC. Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide The area where the SABIC is located should remain improved protection for the driver and front passenger. free from any obstructions. Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects occupant protection. between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) side, or rollover collisions.The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety systemrequired for this vehicle. The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver 2 Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or including some that may produce substantial vehicleside air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. damage — for example, some pole collisions, truckBased on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the otherORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air hand, depending on the type and location of impact,bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, Supple- Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes withmental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and front seat belt little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severepretensioners, as required, depending on several factors, initial deceleration.including the severity and type of impact. The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity andSide Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional type of collision.protection by supplementing the seat belts in certainfrontal collisions depending on several factors, including
  • 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEBecause air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warningover time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are Light in the instrument panel for approxi-not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should mately four to eight seconds for a self-checkhave deployed. when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If theSeat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, itsions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarilyaway from an inflating air bag. or continuously. A single chime will sound if the lightThe ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF position, ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction isor in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-the air bags will not inflate. tics also record the nature of the malfunction.The ORC contains a backup power supply system thatmay deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power orit becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 are possible, based on several factors, including the WARNING! collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to 2 to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. air bag system immediately. The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through theDriver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the airInflator Units bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag InflatorInflator Units are located in the center of the steering Unitwheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit isWhen the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steeringvanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring thequantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity ofAdvanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
  • 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEDriver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and high speed and with such a high force that it could injurefolds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the you if you are not seated properly, or if items arefull size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. Thismilliseconds. especially applies to children.Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable CurtainInflator Units (SABIC) Inflator UnitsThe Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to adesigned to activate only in certain side collisions. particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severityThe ORC determines if a side collision requires the side and type of collision. In these events, the ORC willair bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.collision. A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the sideBased on the severity and type of collision, the side air curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushesbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be the outside edge of the headliner out of the way andtriggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takesbetween the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if youin about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag event the ORC will determine whether to have theinflates. This especially applies to children. The side Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when ing functions:it is inflated. 2 • Cut off fuel to the engine.Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power orvehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of until the ignition is cycled to off.whether or not an air bag should have deployed. • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long asNOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and the battery has power or until the ignition key isSABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle. removed.Front And Side Impact Sensors • Unlock the doors automatically.In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response SystemORC in determining appropriate response to impact functions after an event, the ignition switch must beevents. changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.Enhanced Accident Response System If A Deployment OccursIn the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, ifthe communication network remains intact, and the The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
  • 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate thecollisions. This does not mean something is wrong with skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eyethe air bag system. irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritationIf you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle onor all of the following may occur: your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause structions for cleaning. abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you. floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. WARNING! However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, immediately. seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im- particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con- process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may• Modifications to any part of the air bag system not function properly if modifications are made. 2 could cause it to fail when you need it. You could Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any be injured if the air bag system is not there to air bag system service. If your seat, including your protect you. Do not modify the components or trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any wiring, including adding any kind of badges or way (including removal or loosening/tightening of stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to add aftermarket side steps or running boards. modify the air bag system for persons with dis-• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air abilities, contact your authorized dealer. bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued)
  • 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEAir Bag Warning Light • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. You will want to have the air bags ready to NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine inflate for your protection in a collision. The related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may circuits and interconnecting wiring associated not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptlywith air bag system electrical components. While the air check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the labelbag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of located on the inside of the fuse block cover for thethe following occurs, have an authorized dealer service proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if thethe air bag system immediately. fuse is good.• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during Event Data Recorder (EDR) the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air eight-second interval. bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type ofis designed to record such data as: personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. 2• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. were buckled/fastened; In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the such as law enforcement, that have the special equip- accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, ment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.• How fast the vehicle was traveling. Child RestraintsThese data can help provide a better understanding ofthe circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in theNOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a United States, and every Canadian province, requiresnon-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by that small children ride in proper restraint systems. Thisthe EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
  • 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEChildren 12 years or younger should ride properly NOTE: For additional information, refer tobuckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web-the rear seats rather than in the front. site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htmThere are different sizes and types of restraints forchildren from newborn size to the child almost largeenough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child WARNING!seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct In a collision, an unrestrained child can become aseat for your child. projectile inside the vehicle. The force required toBefore buying any restraint system, make sure that it has hold even an infant on your lap could become soa label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety great that you could not hold the child, no matterStandards. You should also make sure that you can install how strong you are. The child and others could beit in the vehicle where you will use it. badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child RestraintInfants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible 2 and who have not reached the height or Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear weight limits of their child restraint seat of the vehicleSmall Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five- who have out-grown the height or weight point Harness, facing forward in the rear limit of their rear-facing child restraint seat of the vehicleLarger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle forward-facing child restraint, but are too seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat beltChildren Too Large Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat offor Child Restraints out-grown the height or weight limit of the vehicle their booster seat
  • 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEInfants And Child Restraints reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or untilthey reach either the height or weight limit of their rear WARNING!facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of anbe used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Airchild seats. Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the years or younger, including a child in a rearwardvehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until facing infant seat.they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rearConvertible child seats can be used either rearward- seat.facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child Older Children And Child Restraintsseats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be Children who are two years old or who have outgrownused rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats andold. Children should remain rearward-facing until they convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc- tion are for children who are over two years old or who
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of WARNING!their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children shouldremain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for • Improper installation can lead to failure of anas long as possible, up to the highest weight or height infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a 2allowed by the child seat. collision. The child could be badly injured orAll children whose weight or height is above the killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’sforward-facing limit for the child seat should use a directions exactly when installing an infant orbelt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts child restraint.fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it inthe vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave itseat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, itin the vehicle by the seat belt. could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
  • 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEIntegrated Child Booster Seat — If EquippedThe Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in eachoutboard second-row passenger seat. The Booster Seat isdesigned for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22and 39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in (145 cm)tall.To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seatfollow these steps:1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to use the Integrated Child Booster Seat.NOTE: The second row bench with Integrated Child Release LoopBooster Seat must remain in the full rear position during 3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in theuse. booster seat position.2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and seat cushion.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. 6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap. 2 NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on the hips and as snug as possible. Booster Seat4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back firmly against the seatback.
  • 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert 8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” the shoulder portion of the seat belt. 9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. WARNING! Securely lock the seat cushion into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85Children Too Large For Booster Seats 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touchingChildren who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt the child’s thighs and not their stomach?comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?over the front of the seat when their back is against the 2seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If thesimple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use thevehicle’s seat belt alone: child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri- odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face the vehicle seat? or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back. way back?3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
  • 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLERecommendations For Attaching Child RestraintsRestraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below Weight of the LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top Child + Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only + Top Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Rear-Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-Restraint System age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH- 2 equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.
  • 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLELATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints InThis Vehicle
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until theweight of the child restraint) for using the combined weight of the child and the childLATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat beltrestraint? and tether anchor instead of the LATCH 2 system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat No Do not use the seat belt when you use thebelt be used together to attach a rear-facing LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-or forward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint.Can two child restraints be attached using a No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage withcommon lower LATCH anchorage? two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
  • 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLECan the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes The child seat may touch the back of theback of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.Can the head restraints be removed? YesLocating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the childrestraint. You will easily feel them if you run your fingeralong the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. Latch Anchorages
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91Locating The LATCH Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. In addition, there are tether strap anchors lo- Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower cated behind each rear seatback, near to the anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the 2 anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some floor. rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D and E are used for the left outboard position behind the driver (3). Anchorages B and C are used for the center seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child restraint using anchorages C and D. This is not a Tether Strap Anchors LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
  • 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEYou can install up to two child seats using the LATCH Options for installing two child seats using the LATCHsystem at the same time. If you are installing three child anchorages in this vehicle:restraints, you must use the seatbelt to install the center 1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):child restraint. You can use either the LATCH anchors for Install the child seats in the right and left outboardpositions (1) and (3) or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, andthe child seats in the outboard positions. D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing and buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restraint an occupant or child restraint in the center seating position. 2. Left outboard and center seating positions (3 and 2): Install the first child seat in the left outboard seating position using lower anchorages D and E. Install the second child seat using the center anchorages, B and C. Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the opposite door, A. Do not use the remaining right outboard seating position (1) for any occupant. The center child restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this position.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)• Use anchorages B and C to install a LATCH- • If you are installing three child restraints next to compatible child restraint in the center seating each other, you must use the seat belt and the center tether anchor for the center position. You can then 2 position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child restraint using anchorages C and D. This is use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle. belt for installing the child seats in the outboard• A child restraint installed in the center position (2) positions. Please refer to “Installing the LATCH- will block the seat belt buckle for the empty right Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical outboard seat behind the front passenger (1). Do installation instructions. not use this seat for another occupant. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child than one child restraint. restraint systems will be installed as described here. (Continued)
  • 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint 4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto- ing position. matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- position has. tions to attach a tether anchor.2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint tether strap of the child seat so that you can more rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- anchorages. turer’s instructions.3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by that seating position. For some second row seats, you pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) restraint to get a better fit. in any direction.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt WARNING!When using the LATCH attaching system to install achild restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being Improper installation of a child restraint to theused by other occupants or being used to secure child LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re- 2restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directionsinstalling a child restraint using the LATCH system, exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seatthe child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with Beltthe child restraint installation, instead of buckling itbehind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the The seat belts in the passenger seating positions arechild restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Lockingthe seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Bothseat belts are not toys and that they should not play with types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion ofthem. the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
  • 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEmake a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Childinto the retractor. For additional information on ALR, Restraints in this Vehiclerefer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-der “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate isdesigned to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tightwhen webbing is pulled tight and straight through achild restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below andthe following sections for more information about bothtypes of seat belts.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Weight limit of the Always use the tether anchor when usingweight of the child restraint) for using the Child Restraint the seat belt to install a forward facing childTether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a restraint, up to the recommended weightforward facing child restraint? limit of the child restraint. 2Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes Contact between the front passenger seatback of the front passenger seat? and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.Can the head restraints be removed? YesCan the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten Yes In positions with cinching latch platesthe seat belt against the belt path of the child (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twistedrestraint? up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
  • 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEInstalling A Child Restraint with a Switchable back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, youAutomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a locked, you should not be able to pull out any web- better fit. bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. lap portion around the child restraint while you push Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether against the child seat. strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing attach a tether anchor. out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 999. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt “click.” path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the in any direction. 2 lap portion around the child restraint while you pushAny seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the the child restraint rearward and downward into thebelt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. vehicle seat.Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and theLatch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil- dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. attach a tether anchor.2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. path.
  • 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEAny seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tetherbelt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Anchorage — Second Row Captains ChairsIf the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan tobelt path opening of the child restraint, you may have install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon- You may need to move the seat forward to providenect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no topbuckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert tether anchorage for that seating position (see thethe latch plate into the buckle with the release button charts above), move the child restraint to anotherfacing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 position in the vehicle if one is available.to 6, above, to complete the installation of the childrestraint.If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten thebuckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turnthe buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plateinto the buckle again. If you still cannot make the childrestraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to 2 the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. Seat Track Release Lever2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
  • 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Transporting Pets restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly WARNING! injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to a collision. increased head motion and possible injury to the Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses child. Use only the anchorage position directly or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, A long break-in period is not required for the engine and make sure the tether strap does not slip into the drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the SAFETY TIPSlimits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Transporting PassengersWide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-mental and should be avoided. NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. 2The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is ahigh-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil WARNING!changes should be consistent with anticipated climateconditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For • Do not leave children or animals inside parkedthe recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve- cause serious injury or death.hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,OILS MUST NEVER BE USED. inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, peopleA new engine may consume some oil during its first few riding in these areas are more likely to be seriouslythousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be injured or killed.considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter- • Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourpreted as an indication of difficulty. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. (Continued)
  • 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust Gas WARNING! (Continued)• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and WARNING! using a seat belt properly.• On seven passenger models, do not drive the Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon vehicle with the second row passenger seat in the monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. easy entry/exit position (seat cushion flipped up- Breathing it can make you unconscious and can ward and seat moved forward), as this position is eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), only intended for entering and exiting the third follow these safety tips: row seats. Failure to follow this warning may result • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in in personal injury. confined areas any longer than needed to move• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passen- your vehicle in or out of the area. ger to sit in a third row seat with the second row • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger open, make sure that all windows are closed and could slide underneath the seat belt and be seri- the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high ously or even fatally injured. speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. (Continued)
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105 inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised WARNING! (Continued) for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the Vehicle 2 blower at high speed. Seat BeltsThe best protection against carbon monoxide entry into Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking forthe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must besystem. replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaustsystem, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after avehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced afterdamaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding beltdamaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumesto seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
  • 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEAir Bag Warning Light feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper- able. The light should turn on and remain on for four to six seconds as a bulb check when the Floor Mat Safety Information ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your not lit during starting, or if the light stays on, vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal areaflickers, or turns on while driving, have the system unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that theychecked by an authorized dealer. cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedalsDefroster or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and placethe blower control on high speed. You should be able to
  • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Alwaysvehicle control and increase the risk of serious per- properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. 2sonal injury.• Always make sure that floor mats are properly • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the attached to the floor mat fasteners. driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-• Never place or install floor mats or other floor jects can become trapped under the brake pedal coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle secured to prevent them from moving and interfer- control. ing with the pedals or the ability to control the • If required, mounting posts must be properly in- vehicle. stalled, if not equipped from the factory.• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mounting can cause interference with the brake mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of pedal area and interfere with the pedals. control of the vehicle. (Continued)
  • 108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEPeriodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside LightsThe Vehicle Have someone observe the operation of brake lights andTires exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrumentExamine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear panel.patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objectslodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts Door Latchesand cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECONTENTSⅥ MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Ⅵ Uconnect™ Phone (4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 3 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 ▫ Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .116 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 ▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 ▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . .118 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .138 ▫ Manual Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . .118 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .118 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .119
  • 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEⅥ Uconnect™ Phone (8.4/8.4N). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Ⅵ SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 ▫ Uconnect Touch™ 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . .143 ▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . .193 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 ▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .195 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 ▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . .198 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ Recliner Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your ▫ Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 ▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201Ⅵ VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 ▫ Uconnect Touch™ 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . .178 ▫ Third Row Passenger Seats — ▫ Uconnect™ Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Seven Passenger Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 ▫ 60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats . . . . .207
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 ▫ 50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Fold-Flat Feature — ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Seven Passenger Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223Ⅵ TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .216 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223Ⅵ LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 3 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .219 ▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Ⅵ WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .225 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 ▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — ▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
  • 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with ▫ ParkSense௡ Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 ▫ ParkSense௡ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234Ⅵ TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .229 ▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense௡ . . . . . . . .237Ⅵ ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — ▫ Service The ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense௡ System . . . . . . . . . .238 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 ▫ ParkSense௡ System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .238 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Ⅵ PARKVIEW௡ REAR BACK UP CAMERA — ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 ▫ Turning ParkView௡ On Or Off — With Touch Screen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Ⅵ OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Ⅵ PARKSENSE௡ REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 ▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 ▫ ParkSense௡ Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 ▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 ▫ Interior Observation Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .256 ▫ Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped . . . . . . .245 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256Ⅵ GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .246 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .256 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink௡. . .247 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 3 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .250 ▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .251 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 ▫ Using HomeLink௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 ▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Ⅵ ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .258Ⅵ POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .255 Ⅵ POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .263 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 ▫ Power Inverter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
  • 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEⅥ CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 ▫ In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner . . .271Ⅵ STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Ⅵ CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 ▫ Glovebox Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 ▫ Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped . . . . . .273 ▫ Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 ▫ Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 ▫ Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Ⅵ REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 ▫ Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat ▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Storage — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary Ⅵ ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .281 Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 ▫ Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery Retainers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115MIRRORSInside Day/Night MirrorA two-point pivot system allows for horizontal andvertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror tocenter on the view through the rear window. 3Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the smallcontrol lever under the mirror to the night position (leverflipped toward the rear of vehicle). The mirror should beadjusted while set in the day position (toward the wind-shield). Adjusting Rearview Mirror
  • 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEAutomatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped CAUTION!This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glarefrom vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, neveron, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.reverse. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle. Automatic Dimming Mirror
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to 3 collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.Power MirrorsThe power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door Power Mirror Switchestrim panel. Models Without Express Window Feature Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
  • 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEModels With Express Window Feature If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), they willPress and release the mirror select button marked L (left) automatically unfold.or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttonsto move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing. Manual Folding Mirrors — If EquippedThe selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. Theorder to guard against accidentally changing a mirror hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward toposition following an adjustment. resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions:NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate forward, rearward and normal.indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted. Heated Mirrors — If EquippedPower Folding Mirrors — If EquippedThe switch for the power folding mirrors is located These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. Thisbetween the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). feature is activated whenever you turn on the rearPress the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” inpressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-to the normal driving position. ther information.NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If EquippedAn illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use This feature allows for additional flexibility in position-the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the ing the visor to block out the sun.mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati- 1. Fold down the sun visor.cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light. 2. Unclip the visor from the center clip. 3 3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it. Uconnect™ Phone (4.3) Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al- lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone. Illuminated Vanity Mirror
  • 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEUconnect Phone supports the following features: Screen Activated Features:Voice Activated features: • Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen,• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smiths Mo- • Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis- bile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”), played on the touch-screen,• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”), • Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen,• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call Back”), • Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs,• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”, • Listen to Music on your Bluetooth௡ Device via the “Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show touch-screen, Recent Calls”), • Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John to connect to them quickly. Smith Mobile”). Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following WARNING!websites:• www.chrysler.com/uconnect Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable• www.dodge.com/uconnect laws, including laws regarding phone use. All atten-• www.jeep.com/uconnect tion should be kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to 3 do so may result in a collision causing serious injury• or call 1–877–855–8400 or death.If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through youryou may not be able to use any Uconnect™ Phone Bluetooth௡ “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.features. Refer to your mobile service provider or the Uconnect™ features Bluetooth௡ technology - the globalphone manufacturer for details. standard that enables different electronic devices to con-Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between nect to each other without wires or a docking station, sothe system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow youryour vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), asmicrophone for private conversation. long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be
  • 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLElinked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile can be adjusted either from the radio volume controlphone and one audio device can be used with the system knob or from the steering wheel radio control (rightat a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or switch), if so equipped.French languages. OperationUconnect™ Phone Button Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™ The Uconnect™ Phone Button is used to Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone get into the phone mode and make calls, show menu structure. Voice commands are required after most recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phone- Uconnect™ Phone prompts. There are two general meth- book etc., When you press the button you will ods for how Voice Command works:hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command. 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-Uconnect™ Voice Command Button bile”. The Uconnect™ Voice Command Button 2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to is only used for “barge in” and when you are guide you to complete the task. already in a call and you want to send Tones or You will be prompted for a specific command and then make another call. guided through the available options.The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the works best when you talk in a normal conversational beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ prompt. meters away from you.• For certain operations, compound commands can be Natural Speech used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then Your Uconnect™ Phone Voice system uses a Natural “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com- 3 Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine. pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile”. Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out• For each feature explanation in this section, only the certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” compound command form of the voice command is and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I given. You can also break the commands into parts and would like to”. say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the compound command The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase form voice command “Search for John Smith”, or you or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly can break the compound command form into two Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked tence, the system identifies the topic or context and “John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
  • 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEdo you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was Cancel Commandrequested but the specific name was not recognized. At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” andThe system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system you will be returned to the main menu.requires more information from the user it will ask a You can also press the or buttons when thequestion to which the user can respond without pressing system is listening for a command and be returned to thethe Voice Command button. main or previous menu.Voice Command Tree NOTE: Pressing the or buttons while the sys-Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. tem is playing is known as “Barging In”, refer to “Barge In — Overriding Prompts” for further information.Help CommandIf you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phoneknow your options at any prompt, say “Help” following To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pairthe beep. your compatible Bluetooth௡ enabled mobile phone.To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-the button and say a command or say “help”. All ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. TheUconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc- button on the radio control head. tions for pairing.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125NOTE: 2. At the “Paired Phones” screen press the “Add Device” soft-key and a pop-up with instructions will appear.• You must have Bluetooth௡ enabled on your phone to complete this procedure. 3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ en- abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,• The vehicle must be in PARK. select the “Uconnect™” device and enter the PIN.1. You can do either of the following: 3 4. When the pairing process has successfully completed, a. Press the “Settings” hard-key, Page down to the the system will prompt you to choose whether or not “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, press it and you will this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make see the “Paired Phones” screen. If there are no this phone the highest priority. This phone will take paired phones you will see <Empty> as the first precedence over other paired phones within range. device name. Pair A Bluetooth௡ Streaming Audio Device b. Press the MORE hard-key, then press the Phone • Touch the “Player” hard-key to begin, soft-key and you will go to the Uconnect™ Phone main screen. Press the “Settings” soft-key. If there • Press the “Source” soft-key, are no phones currently paired a pop-up will • Change the Source to Bluetooth௡, appear. If you select “Yes” you will go the “Paired Phones” screen, if you select “No” you will return • Touch the “Add Device” soft-key, to the Uconnect™ Phone main menu.
  • 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ en- Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or abled Audio Device. When prompted on the device, Audio Device select the “Uconnect™” device and enter the PIN, Uconnect™ Phone will automatically connect to the• Uconnect™ Phone will display an in process screen highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device while the system is connecting, within range. If you would need to choose a particular Phone or Audio Device follow these steps:• When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not • Touch the “Settings” hard-key, this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, this device the highest priority. This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range. • Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/ Audio” soft-key and then an Audio Device,NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined bythe order in which it was paired. The latest device paired • At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Connectwill have the higher priority. Device” soft-key,You can also use the following VR command to bring up • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.a list of paired audio devices.• “Show Paired Audio Devices”
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite• Touch the “Settings” hard-key, • Touch the “Settings” hard-key,• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key,• Select the Phone or Audio Device, • Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the currently connected device, 3• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key, • At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Make Favor- ite” soft-key; you will see the chosen device move to• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen. the top of the list,Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.• Touch the “Settings” hard-key, Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, Transfer From Mobile Phone• Select the Phone or Audio Device, If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Delete De- names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s vice” soft-key,• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
  • 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEphonebook. Specific Bluetooth௡ Phones with Phone Book downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™ able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-website for supported phones. able for use.• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook, • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name” phone is accessible. section. • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be as soon as the Bluetooth௡ wireless phone connection is edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next start the vehicle. phone connection.• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down- Emergency And Towing Assistance loaded and updated every time a phone is connected The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not to the Uconnect™ Phone. be deleted or the names can not be changed.• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- To change the 911/Help number follow these steps. loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest • Touch the “phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main screen,
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129• Touch the “911/Help” soft-key. Touch the appropriate • Redial, listing to alter, Emergency for example, • Dial by touching in the number,• Once Emergency is touched, the Edit soft-key appears. • Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by Touch the “Edit” soft-key and you will be given the Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back), choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default, • Mobile Phonebook, 3• Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task. • Recent Call Log.Phone Call Features NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can beThe following features can be accessed through the done with 1 call or less active.Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on yourmobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service Dial By Saying A Numberplan provides three-way calling, this feature can be • Press the button to begin,accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check withyour mobile service provider for the features that you • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,have. say “Dial 248-555-1212”,Ways To Initiate A Phone Call • The Uconnect™ Phone will dial 248-555-1212.Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone callwith Uconnect™ Phone.
  • 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECall By Saying A Phonebook Name • Mute/unmute• Press the button to begin, • Transfer the call to/from the phone• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, • Swap 2 active calls say “Call John Doe Mobile”, • Join 2 active calls together• The Uconnect™ Phone will dial the number associated Touch-Tone Number Entry with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe. • Touch the “Phone” soft-key,Call Controls • Touch the “Dial” soft-key,The touch-screen allows you to control the following call • The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,features: • Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and• Answer touch “Call”.• End To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press the button while in a call and say “1234#” or you can• Ignore say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is• Hold/unhold stored in your mobile phonebook.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131Recent Calls Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No CallYou may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the Currently In Progressfollowing call types: When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-• Incoming Calls tem, if on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or• Outgoing Calls Ignore. Press the Answer soft-key or the button on 3 the steering wheel to accept the call.• Missed Calls Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call• All Calls Currently In ProgressThese can be accessed by touching the recent calls If a call is currently in progress and you have anothersoft-key on the Phone main screen. incoming call, you will hear the same network tones forYou can also press the button and say “Show my call waiting that you normally hear when using yourincoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls mobile phone. Uconnect™ Phone will then interrupt thewill be displayed. vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Press the but-NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”, ton to place the current call on hold and answer the“Recent” or “Missed”. incoming call.
  • 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the Toggling Between Callsmarket today do not support rejecting an incoming call If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can press the button until you hear a single beep, indi-only answer an incoming call or ignore it. cating that the active and hold status of the two calls haveMaking A Second Call While Current Call Is In switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.Progress Also you can press the Swap soft-key on the Phone main screen.To make a second call while you are currently on a call,press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed Join Callsby the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to When two calls are in progress (one active and one oncall. The first call will be on hold while the second call is hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone mainin progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.the “Hold” soft-key on the Phone main screen, then diala number from the dialpad, recent calls or from the Call Terminationphonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling To end a call in progress, momentarily press the EndBetween Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer soft-key or the button. Only the active call(s) will beto “Join Calls” in this section. terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call canfar end, a call on hold may not become active automati- continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the callcally. This is cell phone-dependent. ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone andRedial transfer of the call to the mobile phone.• Press the “Redial” soft-key, 3 Uconnect™ Phone Features• or press the button and after the “Listening” Emergency Assistance prompt and the following beep, say “Redial”, If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, reachable: say “Redial”, • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that number for your area. was dialed from your mobile phone. If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone isCall Continuation operational, you may reach the emergency number asCall continuation is the progression of a phone call on the follows:Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been • Press the button to begin,switched to OFF.
  • 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, WARNING! say “Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency Your phone must be turned on and connected to the number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, Uconnect™ Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature and Mexico. in emergency situations, when the mobile phone hasNOTE: network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect™ Phone.• The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and Towing Assistance Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may If you need towing assistance: not be applicable with the available mobile service and area. • Press the button to begin,• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, chances of successfully making a phone call as to that say “Towing Assistance”. for the mobile phone directly.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135NOTE: You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service, such as a paging• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the service or automated customer service line. Some ser- country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528- vices require immediate response selection. In some 2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14- instances, that may be too quick for use of the 3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Uconnect™ Phone. 3 Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card. on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the touch-screen or press the button and say the wordVoice Mail Calling “Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example,To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7with Automated Systems”. 4 6 #), you can press the button and say, “Send 3 7 4 6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence ofWorking With Automated Systems numbers, is also to be used for navigating through anThis method is used in instances where one generally has automated customer service center menu structure, andto press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while to leave a number on a pager.navigating through an automated telephone system.
  • 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEYou can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as • Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported bytones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager some phones are not supported over Bluetooth௡.entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone- These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialingbook entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password”, then a numbered sequence.if you press the button and say “Send Voicemail Barge In — Overriding PromptsPassword”, the Uconnect™ Phone will then send thecorresponding phone number associated with the phone- The button can be used when you wish to skip partbook entry, as tones over the phone. of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately. For example, if a prompt is asking “There are 2 numbersNOTE: with the name John. Say the full name” you could press• The first number encountered for that contact will be the button and say, “John Smith” to select that sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be option without having to listen to the rest of the voice ignored. prompt.• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone Voice Response Length network configurations. This is normal. It is possible for you to choose between Brief and• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time Detailed Voice Response Length. out settings that are too short and may not allow the • Touch the “More” hard-key, then touch the “Settings” use of this feature. soft-key,
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137• Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to Voice phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s Response Length, audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice a command.• Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the show your selection. dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- 3Phone And Network Status Indicators tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feelUconnect™ Phone will provide notification to inform that the call did not go through even though the call is inyou of your phone and network status when you are progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear theattempting to make a phone call using Uconnect™ audio.Phone. The status is given for roaming, network signal Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)strength and phone battery strength. When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still beDialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad able to hear the conversation coming from the otherYou can dial a phone number with your mobile phone party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. Inkeypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone simply touch thevia the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise “Mute” button on the Phone main screen.caution and take precautionary safety measures). Bydialing a number with your paired Bluetooth௡ mobile
  • 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEAdvanced Phone Connectivity Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™ PhoneTransfer Call To And From Mobile PhoneThe Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Commandferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror towithout terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overheadfrom your paired mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone console (if equipped) and the mirror.or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone • Always wait for the beep before speaking.main screen.Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you wouldUconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth௡connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile • Make sure that no one other than you is speakingphone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions during a Voice Command period.described in your mobile phone User’s Manual. • Performance is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • low road noise,
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 • smooth road surface, • Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must • fully closed windows, be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”. • dry weather condition. • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).• Even though the system is designed for users speaking • Even though international dialing for most number in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing cents, the system may not always work for some. 3 number combinations may not be supported.• When navigating through an automated system such • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of compromised with the convertible top down. speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”. Far End Audio Performance• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended. • Audio quality is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting,• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names • low-to-medium vehicle speed, in the Uconnect™ Phonebook. • low road noise,• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo- • smooth road surface, cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the • fully closed windows, entries are not similar. • dry weather conditions, and
  • 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • operation from the driver’s seat. Bluetooth௡ Communication Link• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection not the Uconnect™ Phone. can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced Bluetooth௡ ON mode. by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. Power-Up• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down. After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141Voice Tree 3
  • 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: • If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth than these com-• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your mands will return a response that the contact does not mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send exist in the phonebook. a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to • Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and for John Smith. underlined in the gray shaded boxes.• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or General Information “Other”. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the Calls” or “Missed Calls”. following conditions:• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect sys- • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by tem is equipped with this feature and the mobile the party responsible for compliance could void the phone supports messaging over Bluetooth. user’s authority to operate the equipment.• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone • This device may not cause harmful interference. number supported by your Mobile phone. • This device must accept any interference received,• You can replace “4” with any message number shown including interference that may cause undesired op- on the screen. eration.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143Uconnect™ Phone (8.4/8.4N) • Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call Back”).Uconnect Touch™ 8.4/8.4 NavUconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- • View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al- “Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show Recent Calls”).lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile 3phone. • Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for JohnUconnect™ Phone supports the following features: Smith Mobile”).Voice Activated Features: Screen Activated Features• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith’s • Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen. Mobile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”). • Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming played on the touch-screen. SMS messages. • Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John easily accessible on the Main Phone screen. Smith’s Mobile”). • Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”). • Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
  • 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Sending a text message via the touch-screen. Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth௡ Device via the your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s touch-screen. microphone for private conversation.• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly. WARNING!NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging Any voice commanded system should be used onlyvia Bluetooth௡ for messaging features to work properly. in safe driving conditions following all applicableYour mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your laws, including laws regarding phone use. All atten-vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically tion should be kept on the roadway ahead. Failure tomute your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone. do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death.For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the followingwebsites: The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your• www.chrysler.com/uconnect Bluetooth௡ “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect™ features Bluetooth௡ technology - the global• www.dodge.com/uconnect standard that enables different electronic devices to con-• www.jeep.com/uconnect nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so• or call 1–877–855–8400
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your Uconnect™ Voice Command Buttonmobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as The Uconnect™ Voice Command Buttonlong as your phone is turned on and has been paired to is only used for “barge in” and when you arethe vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone already in a call and you want to send Tones orallows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be make another call.linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile 3phone and one audio device can be used with the system The button is also used to access the Voice Com-at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or mands for the Uconnect™ Voice Command features ifFrench languages. your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect™ Voice Command section for direction on how to use theUconnect™ Phone Button button. The Uconnect™ Phone Button is used to The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi- get into the phone mode and make calls, show cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phone- can be adjusted either from the radio volume control book etc., When you press the button you will knob or from the steering wheel radio control (righthear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command. switch), if so equipped.
  • 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOperation “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com- pound command can be said: “Call John SmithVoice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™ mobile”.Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phonemenu structure. Voice commands are required after most • For each feature explanation in this section, only theUconnect™ Phone prompts. There are two general meth- compound command form of the voice command isods for how Voice Command works: given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo- it. For example, you can use the compound command bile”. form voice command “Search for John Smith”, or you2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to can break the compound command form into two guide you to complete the task. voice commands: “Search Contact” and when askedYou will be prompted for a specific command and then “John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phoneguided through the available options. works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the meters away from you. beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another prompt. Natural Speech Your Uconnect™ Phone Voice system uses a Natural• For certain operations, compound commands can be Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine. used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in Voice Command Treephrases or complete sentences. The system filters out Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I Help Commandwould like to”. If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want toThe system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following 3or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly the beep.Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply presstence, the system identifies the topic or context and the button and say a command or say “help”. Allprovides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of thedo you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was button on the radio control head.requested but the specific name was not recognized. Cancel CommandThe system utilizes continuous dialog; when the systemrequires more information from the user it will ask a At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” andquestion to which the user can respond without pressing you will be returned to the main menu.the Voice Command button. You can also press the or buttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu.
  • 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Pressing the or buttons while the sys- 2. If there is no phone currently connected with thetem is playing is known as “Barging In”, refer to “Barge system, a pop-up will appear.In — Overriding Prompts” for further information.Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile PhoneTo begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pairyour compatible Bluetooth௡ enabled mobile phone.To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. TheUconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-tions for pairing.NOTE:• You must have Bluetooth௡ enabled on your phone to complete this procedure. 3. Select Yes to begin the pairing process. Then, search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ enabled• The vehicle must be in PARK. mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin. the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch™ screen.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 • If No is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Uconnect™ Phone main screen, • Touch the “Add Device” soft-key, • Search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the 3 Uconnect Touch™ screen, • See Step 4 to complete the process.4. Uconnect™ Phone will display an in progress screen while the system is connecting. 5. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range.
  • 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPair Additional Mobile Phones• Touch the “More” soft-key to begin,• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,• Next, touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key,• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ en- abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch™ screen,• Uconnect™ Phone will display an in process screen NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the while the system is connecting, phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher• When the pairing process has successfully completed, priority. the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this You can also use the following VR commands to bring up phone the highest priority. This phone will take pre- the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio: cedence over other paired phones within range. • “Show Paired Phones” or
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151• “Connect My Phone” • When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or notPair A Bluetooth௡ Streaming Audio Device this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make• Touch the “Player” soft-key to begin, this device the highest priority. This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range.• Change the Source to Bluetooth௡, NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the 3• Touch the “Bluetooth௡” soft-key to display the Paired device priority is determined by the order in which it was Audio Devices screen, paired. The latest device paired will have the higher• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key, priority.NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the You can also use the following VR command to bring upsystem, a pop-up will appear. a list of paired audio devices.• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ en- • “Show Paired Audio Devices” abled audio device. When prompted on the device, Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Audio Device Touch™ screen, Uconnect™ Phone will automatically connect to the• Uconnect™ Phone will display an in process screen highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device while the system is connecting,
  • 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEwithin range. If you would need to choose a particular • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.phone or Audio Device follow these steps: Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device• Touch the “Settings” soft-key, • Touch the “Settings” soft-key,• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, • Touch the Phone/Bluetooth௡ soft-key,• Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Paired • Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device Audio Sources” soft-key and then an Audio Device, name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen. currently connected device,Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device • The options pop-up will be displayed,• Touch the “Settings” soft-key, • Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key,• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite name, • Touch the “Settings” soft-key,• The options pop-up will be displayed, • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key,• Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key,
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device • To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook, name, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name” section.• The options pop-up will be displayed, • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins• Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the as soon as the Bluetooth௡ wireless phone connection is chosen device move to the top of the list, 3 made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen. start the vehicle.Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-Transfer From Mobile Phone loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect™ Phone.If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries down-names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s loaded, there may be a short delay before the latestphonebook. Specific Bluetooth௡ Phones with Phone Book downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™ able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-website for supported phones. able for use. • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.
  • 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next phone connection.Managing Your Favorite PhonebookThere are three ways you can add an entry to yourFavorite Phonebook.1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite, touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone main screen. NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select phone- remove an existing favorite. book from the Phone main screen, then select the 3. From the Phone main screen, select phonebook. From appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected the phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up and then select the + soft-key located to the right of the select “Add to Favorites”. phonebook record. Select an empty entry and touch the + on that selected entry. When the Options pop-up
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 appears, touch “Add from Mobile”. You will then be • Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and asked which contact and number to choose from your then touch the + Options soft-key. mobile phonebook. When complete the new favorite • Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to will be shown. remove. 3To Remove A Favorite • The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from• To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the Favs”. Phone main screen.
  • 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEEmergency And Towing AssistanceThe Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can onlybe altered. These cannot be deleted and the names cannotbe changed.To change the Emergency or Towing number follow thesesteps.• Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main screen.• Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Next scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Favorites. • The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting the number• Touch the + Options soft-key. to default.• Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be Phone Call Features altered. The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available and supported by Bluetooth௡ on your mobile service plan.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157For example, if your mobile service plan provides three- NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can beway calling, this feature can be accessed through the done with 1 call or less active.Uconnect™ Phone. Check with your mobile service pro- Dial By Saying A Numbervider for the features that you have. • Press the button to begin,Ways To Initiate A Phone Call 3Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,with Uconnect™ Phone. say “Dial 248-555-1212”,• Redial • The Uconnect™ Phone will dial the number 248-555- 1212.• Dial by touching in the number Call By Saying A Phonebook Name• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by • Press the button to begin, Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back) • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,• Favorite Phonebook say “Call John Doe Mobile”,• Mobile Phonebook • The Uconnect™ Phone will dial the number associated• Recent Call Log with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe.• SMS Message Viewer
  • 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECall Controls Touch-Tone Number EntryThe touch-screen allows you to control the following call • Touch the “Phone” soft-key,features: • Touch the “Dial” soft-key,• Answer • The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,• End • Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and• Ignore touch “Call”.• Hold/unhold To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press the button while in a call and say “Send 1234#” or• Mute/unmute you can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail• Transfer the call to/from the phone password is stored in your mobile phonebook.• Swap 2 active calls• Join 2 active calls together
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159Recent Calls • All CallsYou may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls”following call types: soft-key on the Phone main screen. You can also press the button and say “Show my incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls 3 will be displayed. You can also press the button and say “Show my recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen will be displayed. NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”, “Recent” or “Missed”. Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call Currently In Progress• Incoming Calls When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the• Outgoing Calls Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the• Missed Calls
  • 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEcall. Press the button to accept the call. To ignore the Making A Second Call While Current Call Is Incall, touch the “Ignore” soft-key on the touch-screen. You Progresscan also touch the “answer” soft-key or touch the caller To make a second call while you are currently on a call,ID box. press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followedAnswer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish toCurrently In Progress call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touchingIf a call is currently in progress and you have another the Hold soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial aincoming call, you will hear the same network tones for number from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or fromcall waiting that you normally hear when using your the phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer tomobile phone. Press the phone button, answer soft- “Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To combine twokey or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this section.answer the incoming call. Place/Retrieve A Call From HoldNOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in themarket today do not support rejecting an incoming call During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on thewhen another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can Phone main screen.only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161Toggling Between Calls RedialIf two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), • Press the “Redial” soft-key,touch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen. • or press the and after the “Listening” prompt andOnly one call can be placed on hold at a time. the following beep, say “Redial”,You can also press the button to toggle between the 3active and held phone call. • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “Redial”,Join Calls • The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number thatWhen two calls are in progress (one active and one on was dialed from your mobile phone.hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone mainscreen to combine all calls into a Conference Call. Call ContinuationCall Termination Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has beenTo end a call in progress, momentarily press the but- switched to OFF.ton or the end soft-key. Only the active call(s) will beterminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audiothe new active call. If the active call is terminated by the system until the phone becomes out of range for thefar end, a call on hold may not become active automati- Bluetooth௡ connection. It is recommended to press thecally. This is cell phone-dependent. “transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.
  • 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEUconnect™ Phone Features NOTE:Emergency Assistance • The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the touch-screen.If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone isreachable: • The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may number for your area. not be applicable with the available mobile service andIf the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is area.operational, you may reach the emergency number as • The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower yourfollows: chances of successfully making a phone call as to that• Press the button to begin. for the mobile phone directly.• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “Call Emergency” or “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 • The towing assistance number dialed is based on the WARNING! country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528- Your phone must be turned on and connected to the 2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14- Uconnect™ Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature 3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler network coverage and stays connected to the Group LLC 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage 3 Uconnect™ Phone. details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.Towing Assistance Voice Mail CallingIf you need towing assistance: To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working• Press the button to begin. with Automated Systems”.• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, Working With Automated Systems say “Towing Assistance”. This method is used in instances where one generally hasNOTE: to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.• The towing assistance call may also be initiated by touch. You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
  • 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEservice or automated customer service line. Some ser- You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries asvices require immediate response selection. In some tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pagerinstances, that may be too quick for use of the entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-Uconnect™ Phone. book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail Password”, then if you press the button and sayWhen calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that “Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect™ Phone willnormally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence then send the corresponding phone number associatedon your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.touch-screen or press the button and say the word“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example, NOTE:if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 • The first number encountered for that contact will be4 6 #), you can press the button and say, “Send 3 7 4 sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of ignored.numbers, is also to be used for navigating through anautomated customer service center menu structure, and • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phoneto leave a number on a pager. network configurations. This is normal. • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by • Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to Voice some phones are not supported over Bluetooth௡. Response Length, These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing • Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box a numbered sequence. next to the selection. A check-mark will appear toBarge In — Overriding Prompts show your selection. 3The button can be used when you wish to skip part Phone And Network Status Indicatorsof a prompt and issue your voice command immediately. Uconnect™ Phone will provide notification to informFor example, if a prompt is asking “There are 2 numbers you of your phone and network status when you arewith the name John. Say the full name” you could press attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect™the button and say, “John Smith” to select that Phone. The status is given for network signal strengthoption without having to listen to the rest of the voice and phone battery strength.prompt. Dialing Using The Mobile Phone KeypadVoice Response Length You can dial a phone number with your mobile phoneIt is possible for you to choose between Brief and keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialingDetailed Voice Response Length. via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise• Touch the “More” soft-key, then touch the “Settings” caution and take precautionary safety measures). By soft-key, dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth௡ mobile
  • 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEphone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s Advanced Phone Connectivityaudio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phoneas if you dial the number using voice a command. The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phonedial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing callaudio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- from your paired mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phonetion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phonethat the call did not go through even though the call is in main screen.progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear theaudio. Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile PhoneMute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF) If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth௡When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired mobileable to hear the conversation coming from the other phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructionsparty, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone simply touch theMute button on the Phone main screen.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™ • smooth road surface,Phone • fully closed windows,Voice Command • dry weather condition.• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to • Even though the system is designed for users speaking provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- cents, the system may not always work for some. 3 console (if equipped) and the mirror.• Always wait for the beep before speaking. • When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would the digit string, make sure to say “Send”. speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you. • Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended.• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period. • Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.• Performance is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • low road noise,
  • 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Even though international dialing for most number • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and number combinations may not be supported. not the Uconnect™ Phone.• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by compromised with the convertible top down. lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.Far End Audio Performance • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.• Audio quality is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, SMS • low-to-medium vehicle speed, Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on • low road noise, your phone. • smooth road surface, Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth௡ in order • fully closed windows, to use this feature. If the Uconnect™ Phone determines • dry weather conditions, and your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over • operation from the driver’s seat. Bluetooth௡ the “Messaging” button will be greyed out and the feature will not be available for use.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169NOTE: Uconnect™ Phone SMS is only available whenthe vehicle is not in moving. 3 Once a message is received and viewed or listened to, you will have the following options:Read Messages: • Send a ReplyIf you receive a new text message while your phone is • Forwardconnected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will • Callbe made to notify you that you have a new text message.
  • 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESend Messages Using Soft-Keys:You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To senda new message:• Touch the “Phone” soft-key,• Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message”,• Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person you wish to send the message to, • If multiple numbers are available for the contact select which number you would like to have the message sent, • Press “Send” or “Cancel”.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171Send Messages Using Voice Commands:• Press the button,• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “Send message to John Smith mobile”,• After the system prompts you for what message you 3 want to send, say the message you wish to send or say “List”. There are 18 preset messages.While the list of defined messages are being read, you caninterrupt the system by pressing the button andsaying the message you want to send. List of Preset Messages:After the system confirms that you want to send yourmessage to John Smith, your message will be sent. 1. Yes. 2. No. 3. Okay. 4. I can’t talk right now.
  • 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE5. Call me. 15. Are you there yet?6. I’ll call you later. 16. I need directions.7. I’m on my way. 17. I’m lost.8. Thanks. 18. See you later.9. I’ll be late. Bluetooth௡ Communication Link10. I will be <number> minutes late. Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection11. See you in <number> minutes. can generally be reestablished by switching the phone12. Stuck in traffic. OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth௡ ON mode.13. Start without me. Power-Up14. Where are you? After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173Voice Tree 3
  • 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: 4. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone.1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send 5. These commands can be used during a phone call after a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you pushing the Uconnect™ Voice Command button on which phone number you want to send a message to the steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted for John Smith. while the VR session is active.2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or 6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available “Other”. while a call is active. This is an example that uses a Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing Calls” or “Missed Calls”.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1757. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but 9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that only the first number encountered in a contact name have been pre-loaded in the phonebooks. Commands will be sent. For example if there is a number stored in such as “Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assis- the Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voice- tance” will call the corresponding number stored with mail password” only the Home number will be sent those contacts.8. If your phone does not support phonebook download NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold 3 or call log download over Bluetooth than these com- face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes. mands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook.
  • 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177NOTE: 6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown on the screen.1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send 7. If your phone does not support phonebook download a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you or call log download over Bluetooth than these com- which phone number you want to send a message to mands will return a response that the contact does not for John Smith. exist in the phonebook. 32. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold “Other”. face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing General Information Calls” or “Missed Calls”. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the system is equipped with this feature and the mobile following conditions: phone supports messaging over Bluetooth. • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone the party responsible for compliance could void the number supported by your Mobile phone. user’s authority to operate the equipment. • This device may not cause harmful interference.
  • 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• This device must accept any interference received, WARNING! including interference that may cause undesired op- eration. Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicableVOICE COMMAND laws. All attention should be kept on the roadwayUconnect Touch™ 8.4/8.4 Nav ahead. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death. The Uconnect™ Voice Command system al- When you press the Uconnect™ Voice Command lows you to control your AM, FM radio, satel- button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal lite radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and to give a command. Sirius Travel Link. If no command is spoken the system will say one of twoNOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command responses:system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of • I didn’t understandthe Voice Command system to recognize user voicecommands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking • I didn’t get that, etc.,or a raised voice level.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179If a command is not spoken a second time, the system When using this system, you should speak clearly and atwill respond with an error and give some direction as a normal speaking volume.what can be said based on the context you are in. After The system will best recognize your speech if the win-three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan issession with end. set to low.Pressing the Uconnect™ Voice Command button At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your 3while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, youcan say a command. This will become helpful once you To hear available commands, press the Uconnect™ Voicestart to learn the options. Command button and say “Help”. You will hear available commands for the screen displayed.NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or“Help”.These commands are universal and can be used from anymenu. All other commands can be used depending uponthe active application.
  • 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENatural Speech The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system requires more information from the user it will ask aNatural speech allows the user to speak commands in question to which the user can respond without pressingphrases or complete sentences. The system filters out the Uconnect™ Voice Command button.certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I Uconnect™ Voice Commandswould like to”. The Uconnect™ Voice Command system understandsThe system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase two types of commands. Universal commands are avail-or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly able at all times. Local commands are available if theSmith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- supported radio mode is active.tence, the system identifies the topic or context and Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect™ Voice Com-provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who mand button.do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call wasrequested but the specific name was not recognized.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181Changing the Volume Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session in Radio/Player Modes1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button. In this mode, you can say the following commands:2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect™ Voice 33. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Command button. volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com- mand system is speaking. Please note the volume Disc setting for Voice Command is different than the audio To switch to the disc mode, say “Change source to Disc”. system. This command can be given in any mode or screen: • “Track” (#) (to change the track)
  • 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEVoice Tree
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183NOTE: 3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite station named received by the radio.1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM frequency, such as “98.7 FM”. 4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music types.2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite station name received by the radio. NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold 3 face and shaded grey.
  • 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185NOTE: 3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only available when the iPod is connected and playing.1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist, podcast and audio book names with any correspond- 4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are ing names on the current device that is playing. based on the music database provided by Gracenote.2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold 3 currently playing. Command is only available when face and shaded grey. CD is playing.
  • 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187NOTE: 3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the “Show ski info” to get other forecasts. sports league screen. For example you can say “Show MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines”. NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey.2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items 3 shown on a league screen. For example you can say “Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball Teams”.
  • 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189NOTE: 3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with Navigation.1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles. NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio”, “Navigation”, face and shaded grey. “Phone”, “Climate”, “More” or “Settings”. 3
  • 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191NOTE: NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey.1. You can also say “Find City”, “Find Favorite”, “Find Play by Category”, “Find Play by Name”, “Find Recently Found”, “Where to?” or “Go Home”.2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant”, “Fuel”, 3 “Transit”, “Lodging”, “Shopping”, “Bank”, “Enter- tainment”, “Recreation”, “Attractions”, “Commu- nity”, “Auto Services”, “Hospitals”, “Parking”, “Air- port”, “Police Stations”, “Fire Stations”, or “Auto Dealers”.
  • 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold Driver’s Power Seat — If Equippedface and shaded grey. The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seatSEATS near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up, down, forward, rearward or to tilt the seat.Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of thevehicle. 3 WARNING! • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Power Seat Switch • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
  • 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEAdjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward WARNING!The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch Moving a seat while driving could result in loss ofwhen the desired position has been reached. control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatThe height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull belts and while the vehicle is parked. Seriousupward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat injury or death could result from a poorly adjustedwill move in the direction of the switch. Release the seat belt.switch when the desired position is reached. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.Tilting The Seat Up Or Down In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four which could result in serious injury or death.directions. Pull upward or push downward on the frontor rear of the seat switch; the front or rear of the seatcushion will move in the direction of the switch. Releasethe switch when the desired position is reached.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 CAUTION! Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s 3 path.Power Lumbar — If EquippedThe Power Lumbar switch is located on the outboard sideof the driver’s seat. Push the switch forward to increasethe lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to de- Power Lumbar Switchcrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or down-ward on the switch will raise or lower the position of the Heated Seats — If Equippedsupport. On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The heated seats are operated using the Uconnect™ Touch System.
  • 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch™ 4.3: WARNING! Touch the CLIMATE hard-key (located on the left side of• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin the Uconnect Touch™ display) to enter the climate con- because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, trol screen. spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- tion or other physical condition must exercise care Touch the “Driver” or “Pass” seat soft-key when using the seat heater. It may cause burns (located on the Uconnect Touch™ display) even at low temperatures, especially if used for once to select HI-level heating. Touch the soft- long periods of time. key a second time to select LO-level heating.• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that Touch the soft-key a third time to shut the heating insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. elements OFF. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera- ture of the seat.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater willprovide a boosted heat level during the first four minutesof operation. Then, the heat output will drop to thenormal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, thesystem will automatically switch to LO-level after amaximum of 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that 3time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicatingthe change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-cally after a maximum of 30 minutes.For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch™ 8.4and 8.4 Nav:Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the Uconnect Controls Soft-KeyTouch™ display.
  • 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt once to select HI-level heating. Press the soft- within two to five minutes. key a second time to select LO-level heating. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start Press the soft-key a third time to shut theheating elements OFF. On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. Manual Front Seat Adjustments For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor. Heated Seats Soft-Keys
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. 3 • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Manual Seat AdjustmentWhile sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located andmove the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar oncethe desired position has been reached. Then, using bodypressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to besure that the seat adjusters have latched.
  • 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLERecliner Adjustment WARNING!The recline lever is located on the outboard side of theseat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the • Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving islever, lean back to the desired position and release the dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat couldlever. To return the seatback to its normal upright posi- cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not betion, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjustonce the seatback is in the upright position. the seat only while the vehicle is parked. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped The seat height control lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. Raise the lever to raise the seat. Lower the lever to lower the seat. The total seat travel is approxi- mately 2.15 in (55 mm). Seatback Release
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 hardback surface that you can use as a work surface when the seat is folded flat and the vehicle is not in motion. 3 Seat Height Adjustment LeverFold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If EquippedThis feature allows for extended cargo space. When the Fold-Flat Seatseat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floorsurface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold theto the instrument panel). The fold-flat seatback also has a seat.
  • 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is The head restraints for all occupants must be prop- dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu- cause you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad- the vehicle is parked. justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjustedHead Restraints or removed could cause serious injury or death in theHead restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury event of a collision.by restricting head movement in the event of a rear Active Head Restraints (AHR) — Front Seatsimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the topof the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo- nents, and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front halfof the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gapbetween the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.This system is designed to help prevent or reduce theextent of injuries to the driver and front passenger incertain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re- 3straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-hicle” for further information.To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the headrestraint. To lower the head restraint, press the pushbutton, located at the base of the head restraint, and pushdownward on the head restraint. Push Button
  • 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEFor comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tiltedforward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer tothe back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of thehead restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the headrestraint to move the head restraint away from yourhead. Active Head Restraint (Tilted) Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205NOTE: WARNING!• The head restraints should only be removed by quali- fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of • Do not place items over the top of the Active Head the head restraints require removal, see your autho- Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable rized dealer. DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event 3• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re- of a collision and could result in serious injury or straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Supplemental death. Active Head Restraints (AHR)/Resetting Active Head • Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before Starting struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose Your Vehicle” for further information. cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac- tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re- straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
  • 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEHead Restraints — Second Row Seats NOTE:The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head re- • The head restraints should only be removed by quali-straints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the fied technicians, for service purposes only. If any of thehead restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the head restraints require removal, see your authorizedadjustment button, located on the base of the head dealer.restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. • For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. The head restraints should be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Adjustment Button
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven Passenger 60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger SeatsModels To provide additional storage area, each second-rowThese head restraints are non-adjustable and non- passenger seat can be folded flat. This allows for ex-removable. However, you can fold them forward when tended cargo space and still maintains some seating roomthey are not in use by passengers. Refer to “50/50 Split if needed.Third-Row Passenger Seats With Fold-Flat Feature — 3 NOTE: Prior to folding the second-row passenger seat,Seven Passenger Models” for further information. make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position. This will allow the second-row seat to fold easily. WARNING! Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat WARNING! without having the head restraint unfolded and • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people result in personal injury to the passenger in the event riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously of a collision. injured or killed. (Continued)
  • 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • On seven passenger models, do not allow a passen- ger to sit in a third row seat with the second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and be seri- ously or even fatally injured. Seatback ReleaseTo Fold The Seat 2. Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle1. Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of pressure. the seat. 3. Lift the control lever with the other hand, allow the seatback to move forward slightly, and then release the lever.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 Forward And Rearward Adjustment WARNING! The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. Lift To prevent personal injury or damage to objects, the lever to move the seat forward or rearward. Release keep your head, arms, and objects out of the folding the lever once the seat is in the desired position. Then, path of the seatback. using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. 34. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.To Unfold The SeatRaise the seatback and lock it in place. WARNING! Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. Manual Seat Adjustment
  • 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked.Recliner AdjustmentThe recline lever is on the outboard side of the seat. Torecline the seatback, lean back, lift the lever, position theseatback as desired, and then release the lever. To return Recline Leverthe seatback to its normal upright position, lean back, liftthe lever, lean forward, and then release the lever oncethe seatback is in the upright position.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust 3 the seat only while the vehicle is parked. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. Seatback/ArmrestSeatback/Armrest — Second Row Passenger Seat Raise the seatback/armrest and lock it in place when notThe latch release-loop is located at the top of the in use, or when additional seating area is required.seatback/armrest. Pull the release-loop forward to re-lease the latch and then downward to lower theseatback/armrest.
  • 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the WARNING! seatback forward. Then, in one fluid motion, the seat Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward on its certain that the seatback/armrest is locked securely tracks. into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.Stadium Tip ’n Slide™ (Easy Entry/Exit Seat) —Seven Passenger ModelsThis feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit thethird-row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle.To Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat ForwardNOTE: Raise the seatback/armrest before moving theseat to allow for full seat travel. Tip ’n Slide™ Control Lever
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 WARNING! Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this posi- tion, as it is only intended for entering and exiting the third row seats. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. 3 To Unfold And Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat Rearward Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and then continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks until it locks in place. Tip n Slide Seat™NOTE: A hand-grip is molded into the front of each Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place.quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry Adjust the seat track position as desired. Using bodyand exit from the third-row passenger seats. pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
  • 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Fold The Seatback WARNING! Pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked seatback upward, push the seatback forward slightly, and securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not release the release-loop. Then, continue to push the provide the proper stability for child seats and/or seatback forward. The head restraints will fold automati- passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause cally as the seatback moves forward. serious injury.50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats WithFold-Flat Feature — Seven Passenger ModelsTo provide additional storage area, each third-row pas-senger seatback can be folded flat. This allows for ex-tended cargo space and still maintains some rear seatingroom if needed.NOTE: Prior to folding the third-row passenger seat-back, make sure the second-row passenger seatback isnot in a reclined position. This will allow the seatback tofold easily. Seatback Release
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215To Unfold The Seatback The seatback can also be locked in the reclined position.Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it To do so, pull the latch release-loop located at the top oftoward you to raise the seatback. Continue to raise the the seatback upward, allow the seatback to recline, and release the release-loop.seatback until it locks in place. Raise the head restraint tolock it in place. WARNING! 3 • Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. • Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat without having the head restraint unfolded and locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury to the passenger in the event of a collision. (Continued) Assist Strap
  • 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOODTwo latches must be released to open the hood.1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel. Hood Release 2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever near the center of the grille between the grille and hood opening. Push the safety latch lever to the right and then raise the hood.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 3 Underhood Safety Latch Hood Prop RodUse the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open CAUTION!position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the holeon the underside of the hood. To prevent possible damage: • Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod is fully seated into its storage retaining clips. (Continued)
  • 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS CAUTION! (Continued) Headlight Switch• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the The headlight switch is located on the left side of the hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instru- with both latches engaged. ment panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights. WARNING!Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving yourvehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could openwhen the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.Failure to follow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death. Headlight Switch
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent Headlights On With Wipers (Available withfor parking lights and instrument panel light operation. Automatic Headlights Only)Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for When this feature is active, the headlights will turn onheadlight, parking light and instrument panel light op- approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned oneration. if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. InAutomatic Headlights — If Equipped addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are 3 turned off if they were turned on by this feature.This system automatically turns the headlights on or offaccording to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can berotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the turned on or off using the Uconnect Touch™ System,AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understandingtime delay feature is also on. This means the headlights Your Instrument Panel” for further information.will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the Headlight Time Delayignition into the OFF position. To turn the automaticsystem off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO This feature provides the safety of headlight illuminationposition. for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-lights will come on in the automatic mode.
  • 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equippedwhile the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the The Daytime Running Lights will turn ON the first timeheadlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins the vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain ON unlesswhen the headlight switch is turned off. the parking brake is applied. Upon returning to theNOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds PARK position, the DRLs will turn OFF. DRLs will turnof turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature. OFF when the ignition is switched OFF.If you turn the headlights, parking lights or ignition NOTE: The daytime running lights can be turned on andswitch ON again, the system will cancel the delay. off using the Uconnect Touch™ System, refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings — Customer ProgrammableIf you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forturn off in the normal manner. further information.NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable us- Lights-On Remindering the Uconnect Touch™ System, refer to “UconnectTouch™ Settings — Customer Programmable Features” If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignitionin “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driverinformation. when the driver’s door is opened.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221Fog Lights — If Equipped To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parkingThe front fog light switch is built into the headlight lights or the low beam headlights and press theswitch. headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch. An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates 3 when the fog lights are turned on. NOTE: The fog lights will operate when the low beam headlights or parking lights are on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights. Fog Light Switch
  • 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEMultifunction Lever Turn SignalsThe multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrowssignals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The on each side of the instrument cluster flash to showmultifunction lever is located on the left side of the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.steering column. NOTE: • If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. • A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC (if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. Multifunction Lever
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223Lane Change Assist Interior LightsTap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond The interior lights come on when a door is opened.the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn offthree times then automatically turn off. automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch isHigh/Low Beam Switch moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on 3Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch because a door is open. This includes the glove box light,the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the lightFlash-To-Pass switch.You can signal another vehicle with your headlights bylightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. Thiswill turn on the high beams headlights until the lever isreleased.
  • 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEDimmer Controls Dome Light PositionThe dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to thelocated on the left side of the instrument panel. Rotating second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interiorthe dimmer control upward with the parking lights or lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in thisheadlights on will increase the brightness of the instru- position.ment panel lights, door map pockets and cupholders (ifequipped). Interior Light Defeat (OFF) Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open. Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the park- ing lights or headlights are on. Dimmer Controls
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225Map/Reading LightsThese lights are mounted between the sun visors on theoverhead console. Refer to “Overhead Console” in “Un-derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation. 3WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERSThe windshield wiper/washer control lever is located onthe left side of the steering column. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the lever. For information on using the rear window wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve- hicle”.
  • 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEIntermittent Wiper System There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulateUse the intermittent wiper system when weather condi- the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every twotions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause seconds to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles at vehicle speeds below 10 mphbetween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the wind-shield wiper/washer control lever to one of the first five (16 km/h). At speeds greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay varies from a minimum of one cycle every seconddetents to select the desired delay interval. to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles. NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled. Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera- tion. Front Wiper Control
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 CAUTION! • Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than OFF. 3 • In cold weather, always turn OFF the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning OFF the engine. If the wiper switch is left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. Front Wiper Control • Always remove any buildup of snow that preventsNOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the the windshield wiper blades from returning to the“park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while “park” position. If the windshield wiper control isthey are operating. The wipers will resume operation turned OFF, and the blades cannot return to thewhen you turn the ignition switch back to the ON “park” position, damage to the wiper motor mayposition. occur.
  • 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWindshield Washers WARNING!To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to Sudden loss of visibility through the windshieldthe second detent. could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing ofIf you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the windshield during freezing weather, warm thethe delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for windshield with the defroster before and duringtwo or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then windshield washer use.resume the intermittent interval previously selected.If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in Mist Featurethe OFF position, the wipers will operate for two or three Push the washer knob, located on the end of the multi-wipe cycles and then turn OFF. function lever, inward to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever. NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229Headlights On With Wipers (Available withAutomatic Headlights Only)When this feature is active, the headlights will turn onapproximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned onif the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. Inaddition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are 3turned off if they were turned on by this feature.NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can beturned on or off using the Uconnect Touch™ System,refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further information. Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control HandleTILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN To unlock the steering column, push the control handle downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steeringThis feature allows you to tilt the steering column wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen orupward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheelshorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steeringhandle is located below the steering wheel at the end of column in position, pull the control handle upward untilthe steering column. fully engaged.
  • 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve- hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPEDWhen engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over Electronic Speed Control Buttonsaccelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +(40 km/h). 4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-right side of the steering wheel. tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic To Set A Desired SpeedSpeed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehiclevehicle set speed. has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) buttonTo Activate and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in 3the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speedoff, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise and on level ground before pressing the SET button.Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be To Deactivateturned off when not in use. A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL WARNING! button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. speed memory. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
  • 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo Resume Speed decrease until the button is released. Release the button when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speedTo resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) will be established.button and release. Resume can be used at any speedabove 20 mph (32 km/h). Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap ofTo Vary The Speed Setting the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button To Accelerate For Passingis continually pressed, the set speed will continue to Press the accelerator as you would normally. When theincrease until the button is released, then the new set pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.speed will be established. Using Electronic Speed Control On HillsPressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of vehicle set speed.the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintainsTo decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is speed up and down hills. A slight speed change onset, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually moderate hills is normal.held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense௡ Systemit may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system andControl. recommendations. ParkSense௡ will retain the last system state (enabled or WARNING! disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the changed to the ON/RUN position. 3 system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve- ParkSense௡ can be active only when the shift lever is in hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you REVERSE. If ParkSense௡ is enabled at this shift lever could lose control and have an accident. Do not use position, the system will remain active until the vehicle Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. above. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximatelyPARKSENSEா REAR PARK ASSIST — IF 6 mph (9 km/h).EQUIPPED ParkSenseா SensorsThe ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist system provides visualand audible indications of the distance between the rear The four ParkSense௡ sensors, located in the rear fascia/fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
  • 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEobstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in ParkSenseா Display(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning displaydirection, depending on the location, type and orienta- will turn ON indicating the system status.tion of the obstacle.ParkSenseா Warning DisplayThe ParkSense௡ Warning screen will only be displayed ifSound and Display is selected from the UconnectTouch™ System. Refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-formation.The ParkSense௡ Warning screen is located within theElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It providesvisual warnings to indicate the distance between the rearfascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in Park Assist ReadyUnderstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-mation.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 3 Park Assist System Off Slow ToneThe system will indicate a detected obstacle by showingthree solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the EVICdisplay will show fewer arcs and the sound tone willchange from slow, to fast, to continuous.
  • 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Fast Tone Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera- tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 79-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than (in/cm) 79 in (200 cm) (200-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30 cm) Audible Alert None Single 1/2- Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone 3 Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow (Continuous) Flashing Flashing FlashingEnabling And Disabling ParkSenseா in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSEParkSense௡ can be enabled and disabled using theUconnect Touch™ System. The available choices are: Off, and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as theSound Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “UconnectTouch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument vehicle is in REVERSE at or below 7 mph (11 km/h).Panel” for further information. Service The ParkSenseா Rear Park Assist SystemWhen the ParkSense௡ soft-key is pressed to disable the When the ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist system is mal-system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS- functioning, the Electronic Vehicle Information CenterTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds. (EVIC) will actuate a single chime, once per ignitionRefer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” cycle, and it will display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”,
  • 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE“SERVICE PARK ASSIST”, or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST Cleaning The ParkSenseா SystemSYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- Clean the ParkSense௡ sensors with water, car wash soaption Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do notPanel” for further information. When the shift lever is scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a fault age the sensors.condition, the EVIC will display the “CLEAN PARKASSIST ”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST”, or the “SERVICE ParkSenseா System Usage PrecautionsPARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the NOTE:vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense௡will not operate. • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense௡ system operat-If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic ing properly.Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the outersurface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations couldclean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc- affect the performance of ParkSense௡.tion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues • When you turn ParkSense௡ off, the EVIC will displayto appear see an authorized dealer. “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once youIf “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST turn ParkSense௡ off, it remains off until you turn it onSYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer. again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239• When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE position object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE and ParkSense௡ is turned off, the instrument cluster PARK ASSIST” message to be displayed in the EVIC. will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” mes- sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE at or CAUTION! below 7 mph (11 km/h). • ParkSense௡ is only a parking aid and it is unable to• Clean the ParkSense௡ sensors regularly, taking care not recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. 3 to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. detected at all. Obstacles located above or below Failure to do so can result in the system not working the sensors will not be detected when they are in properly. The ParkSense௡ system might not detect an close proximity. obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using a false indication that an obstacle is behind the ParkSense௡ in order to be able to stop in time when fascia/bumper. an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., driver looks over his/her shoulder when using must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear ParkSense௡. fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
  • 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)• Drivers must be careful when backing up even • Before using the Rear Park Assist system, it is when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always strongly recommended that the ball mount and check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve- you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to backing up. You are responsible for safety and vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be must continue to pay attention to your surround- much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia ings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. death. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and (Continued) shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241PARKVIEWா REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rearEQUIPPED camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView௡ RearBack Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the widthimage of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate thethe shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to 3displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a a hitch/receiver. The static grid lines will show separatecaution note to “check entire surroundings” across the zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of thetop of the screen. After five seconds this note will vehicle. The following table shows the approximatedisappear. The ParkView௡ camera is located on the rear distances for each zone:of the vehicle above the rear License plate. Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m) Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
  • 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION!Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView௡ should onlyusing the ParkView௡ Rear Back Up Camera. Always be used as a parking aid. The ParkView௡ camera ischeck carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in yourcheck for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc- drive path.tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must beresponsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using ParkView௡ to be able tomust continue to pay attention while backing up. stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. mended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView௡. NOTE:If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243Turning ParkViewா On Or Off — With TouchScreen Radio1. Turn the Radio on.2. Press the “More” soft-key.3. Press the “Settings” soft-key. 34. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.5. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview௡ Backup Camera” to enable/disable.OVERHEAD CONSOLE Overhead ConsoleThe overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights, Courtesy/Reading Lightsstorage for sunglasses, an interior observation mirror andan optional power sunroof switch. The overhead console has two courtesy lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. The
  • 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEcourtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press in on Sunglasses Storageeach lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle. To access the storage compartment, press on the raisedPress the lens a second time to turn each light off. You bars on the compartment door in the center of the consolemay adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the and release and the door will swing downward.outside ring, which is identified with four directionalarrows. Sunglasses Storage Compartment Courtesy/Reading Light
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245Interior Observation MirrorThe convex interior observation mirror provides thedriver and front seat passenger a wide field of view toconveniently view passengers sitting in the rear passen-ger seats. To use the interior observation mirror, press onthe raised bars on the compartment door and release (the 3door will swing downward), then raise the door until it isalmost closed and release. The door will latch in positionto use the interior observation mirror.NOTE: From the “observation mirror” position, the doorcan only be closed. Observation MirrorTo return to the full open position, the door must first beclosed and then opened by pressing the latch again to Power Sunroof Switch — If Equippedrelease. Refer to “Power Sunroof” in “Understanding the Fea- tures of Your Vehicle” for further information.
  • 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEGARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPEDHomeLink௡ replaces up to three hand-held transmittersthat operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-ized gates, lighting or home security systems. TheHomeLink௡ unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Voltbattery.The HomeLink௡ buttons, located on either the overheadconsole, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-ent HomeLink௡ channels. The HomeLink௡ indicator islocated above the center button. HomeLink௡ Buttons/Overhead Consoles
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 For more efficient programming and accurate transmis- sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink௡ system. Erase all channels before you begin programming. To 3 erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink௡ buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes. NOTE: HomeLink௡ Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner • Erasing all channels should only be performed whenNOTE: HomeLink௡ is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- programming HomeLink௡ for the first time. Do notrity Alarm is active. erase channels when programming additional buttons.Before You Begin Programming HomeLinkா • If you have any problems, or require assistance, pleaseBe sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atbefore you begin programming. www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
  • 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEProgramming A Rolling CodeFor programming garage door openers that were manu-factured after 1995. These garage door openers can beidentified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button locatedwhere the hanging antenna is attached to the garage dooropener. It is NOT the button that is normally used toopen and close the door. The name and color of thebutton may vary by manufacturer. Training The Garage Door Opener 1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2492. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN- away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to pro- ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices gram while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in there may be a light that blinks when the garage door view. opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink௡ NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next button you want to program and the hand-held trans- step after the LEARN button has been pressed. 3 mitter button. 6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink௡ button twice (holding the button for two cator light. The HomeLink௡ indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device and then rapidly after HomeLink௡ has received the activates, programming is complete. frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti- lease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to from slow to rapid. complete the training.5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink௡ buttons, locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels. attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
  • 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEReprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to pro-To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, gram while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light infollow these steps: view.1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink௡2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until button you want to program and the hand-held trans- the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do mitter button. not release the button. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- cator light. HomeLink௡ indicator will flash slowly and ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining then rapidly after HomeLink௡ has received the fre- steps. quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes fromProgramming A Non-Rolling Code slow to rapid.For programming Garage Door Openers manufacturedbefore 1995. 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ button and observe the indicator light.1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- ming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink௡ button is pressed.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 • To program the remaining two HomeLink௡ buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States erase the channels. that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” afterReprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button several seconds of transmission.To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- 3follow these steps: nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans- mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink௡1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do time-out in the same manner. not release the button. It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all door or gate motor. remaining steps. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in view.
  • 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink௡ button, If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held programming, plug it back in at this time. transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink௡ has Reprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, fully trained. follow these steps:4. Watch for the HomeLink௡ indicator to change flash 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do door may open and close while you are programming. not release the button.5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ button 3. Without releasing the button proceed with and observe the indicator light. “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- follow all remaining steps. ming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink௡ button is pressed. • To program the two remaining HomeLink௡ buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253Using HomeLinkா Troubleshooting TipsTo operate, press and release the programmed If you are having trouble programming HomeLink௡, hereHomeLink௡ button. Activation will now occur for the are some of the most common solutions:programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera- • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light- ter.ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may 3also be used at any time. • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.Security • Did you unplug the device for programming andIt is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn remember to plug it back in?in your vehicle. If you have any problems, or require assistance, pleaseTo do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atseconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot beerased.The HomeLink௡ Universal Transceiver is disabled whenthe Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
  • 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information WARNING! This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry• Your motorized door or gate will open and close Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following while you are programming the universal trans- two conditions: ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door 2. This device must accept any interference that may be opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as received including interference that may cause unde- required by Federal safety standards. This includes sired operation. most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without NOTE: these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex- safety information or assistance. pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- ance could void the user’s authority to operate the gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage device. while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. • The term IC before the certification/registration num- ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci- fications were met.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!The power sunroof switch is located between the sunvisors on the overhead console. • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants, particu- 3 larly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen- gers are also properly secured. Power Sunroof Switch • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
  • 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOpening Sunroof — Express position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- cally. This is called “Express Close”. During ExpressPress the switch rearward and release it within one-half Close operation, any movement of the switch will stopsecond and the sunroof will open automatically from any the sunroof.position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Closing Sunroof — Manual ModeOpen operation, any movement of the sunroof switch To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in thewill stop the sunroof. forward position. Any release of the switch will stop theOpening Sunroof — Manual Mode movement and the sunroof will remain in a partiallyTo open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and heldto full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially Pinch Protect Featureopened condition until the switch is pushed and held This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening ofrearward again. the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-Closing Sunroof — Express struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, thePress the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-second and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind Buffetingin Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be Wind buffeting can be described as the perception ofa Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in theVenting Sunroof — Express ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certainPress and release the Vent button within one half second 3 open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs withcalled “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of the rear windows open, open the front and rear windowssunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occursmovement of the switch will stop the sunroof. with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening toSunshade Operation minimize the buffeting or open any window.The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenancesunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to cleanNOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.open.
  • 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEIgnition Off Operation Sunroof Fully ClosedFor vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Press the switch forward and release to ensure that theInformation Center (EVIC) sunroof is fully closed.The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETSseconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCKposition. Opening either front door will cancel this A 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet located in the centerfeature. console below the radio. The power outlet has power available when the ignition switch in the ON/RUN orFor vehicles equipped with the EVIC ACC position.The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCKposition. Opening either front door will cancel thisfeature.NOTE: The delay time if programmable using theUconnect Touch™ system. Refer to “Uconnect Touch™System” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 A second 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located inside the center console storage area. Power is available with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN, ACC or LOCK position. 3 Front 12 Volt Power OutletThis power outlet will also operate a conventional cigarlighter unit. To preserve the heating element, do nothold the lighter in the heating position. Center Console 12 Volt Power Outlet
  • 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEA third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the leftof the center console. This power outlet has power quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outletavailable when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, ON or has power available when the ignition switch is in theACC position. ON or ACC position. Rear Seat 12 Volt Power Outlet Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR௡ knob andelement must be used. CAUTION! • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power 3 rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. • The power outlet on the bottom of the center console shares the fuse with the power outlet on the back of the console. The combined usage must not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs Power Outlet Fuses only. Do not insert any other object in the power 1 — F103 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin & Power Outlet outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the Console Rear fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause 2 — F102 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel & Power damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Outlet Left Rear Cargo Area Warranty.
  • 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION!To avoid serious injury or death: • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if• Do not touch with wet hands. plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or vehicle. prevent the engine from starting.• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, shock and failure. vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat- tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit- tently and with greater caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. (Continued)
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 CAUTION! (Continued) • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces- sory bracket from the plug.POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED 3Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC (150Watt maximum) power outlet located on the back of thecenter console. This outlet can power mobile phones,electronics and other low power devices requiring powerup to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such asPlaystation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as Power Inverterwill most power tools. The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
  • 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEmay have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter Power Inverter Operationmanually press the power inverter button OFF and ON. The power inverter is turned on and off using theTo avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings Uconnect Touch™ System.on electrical devices prior to using the inverter. Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch™ 4.3NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the poweroutlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC (150 Watt To turn the power inverter on or off perform the follow-maximum) power rating is exceeded. ing: 1. Press the “More” hard-key (located next to the WARNING! Uconnect Touch™ display). To avoid serious injury or death: 2. Press the “Outlet” soft-key (located on the Uconnect • Do not use a three-prong adaptor. Touch™ display) to turn the power inverter On or Off. • Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. • Do not touch with wet hands. Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch™ 8.4 and • Close the lid when not in use. 8.4 Nav • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric To enable or disable the power inverter perform the shock and failure. following: 1. Press the “Controls” soft-key.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2652. Press the “Outlet” soft-key to turn the power inverter For passengers in the second row there are two cuphold- On or Off. ers, located in the center armrest between the two seats.CUPHOLDERS When the armrest is folded flat the cupholders are in the back of the Head Restraint. The Head Restraint can beThere are two cupholders, located in the center floor adjusted to better position the cupholders.console, for the front passengers. 3 Armrest Cupholders Floor Console Cupholders
  • 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEFor vehicles equipped with third row seating, there are WARNING!additional cupholders located in the trim panels.In addition to cupholders, vehicles may also be equipped If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottlewith bottle holders. The bottle holders are located on the holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-door trim panels. ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury. Door Bottle Holder
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267STORAGE Floor Console StorageGlovebox Storage An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the floor console.The glovebox storage compartment is located on thepassenger side of the instrument panel. Pull on the releasehandle to open the glovebox storage compartment. 3 Floor Console Cubby Bin Glovebox Storage Compartment
  • 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECenter Console Storage Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front ofThere is a storage compartment located under the center the lid, to open the storage compartment.console armrest. Opened Storage Compartment Center Console
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269Sliding Armrest WARNING!The center console armrest can also be slid rearward foreasy access to the storage area. Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart- ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music players, and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices 3 while driving can cause an accident due to distrac- tion, resulting in death or injury. Sliding Armrest
  • 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEFlip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage — If NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do notEquipped interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure itThe seat latch release-loop is located in the center of theseat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback. latches to the base.Pull the loop upward to release the latch and thenforward to open the seat to the detent position. WARNING! Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper stability for passen- gers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury. Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary Storage Bin This is a temporary storage bin designed for use when the seatback/armrest is down. Be sure to remove all items from this bin before raising the seatback/armrest. Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery Retainers In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner— If Equipped NOTE: Position the front seat to at least a mid-trackA map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located position to provide easier access to the storage bin.on the back of the drivers seatback. An in-floor storage bin is located behind each front seat. Each 1.6 gal (5.9 l) bin can hold up to 12, 12 oz (0.35 l) 3 cans, plus ice, or other items. The removable bin liner allows for easy filling, emptying, and cleaning. Seat Storage And Grocery Retainers
  • 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo access the bin, position the floor mat aside (if The liner can be removed for easy cleaning by lifting onequipped). Pull the door latch release-loop upward to the notches as shown.release the latch and then forward to open the bin door. Removable Liner In-Floor Storage
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273CARGO AREA FEATURES To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, twice for low, and a third time to return to off.Rechargeable Flashlight — If EquippedThe rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its chargingstation in the left rear quarter trim panel. To remove it, presson the indent on the side of the flashlight and release. 3 Three-Press Switch NOTE: Be sure to return the flashlight to its charging station when not in use to ensure it is ready for operation the next time you need it. Rechargeable Flashlight
  • 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECargo Management System Seven Passenger System FeaturesFive Passenger System Features • A large built-in storage bin with a hinged hardcover located in the floor behind the third-row passenger• A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built-in seats. storage bin. • 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat• A tri-fold door built into the load floor that allows easy feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer access to items in the built-in storage bin. to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features of Your• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat Vehicle” for further information. feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer • 50/50 split third-row passenger seats with fold flat to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer Vehicle” for further information. to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features of Your• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature, Vehicle” for further information. which extends cargo space even further. Refer to • An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature, “Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve- which extends cargo space even further. Refer to hicle” for further information. “Seats” in “Understanding The Features of Your Ve-• Cargo tie-downs. hicle” for further information.• A retractable cargo area cover (if equipped). • Cargo tie-downs.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275Cargo Tie-Downs WARNING! Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat to come 3 loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.Cargo tie-downs are located on both rear trim panels.These tie-downs should be used to secure loads safelywhen the vehicle is moving. Cargo Tie-Downs
  • 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the WARNING! seatback. This could impair visibility or become a The weight and position of cargo and passengers can dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision. change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle • To help protect against personal injury, passengers handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per- should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes vehicle: only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de- use seat belts. scribed on the label attached to the left door or left Retractable Cargo Area Cover (If Equipped) — Five door center pillar. Passenger Models• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear protect passengers from loose cargo. axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to cargo area behind the top of the rear seats. sway.
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keepitems out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near theliftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when notin use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle tomake more room in the cargo area. 3To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that theflat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert eitherthe left or the right spring-loaded post (located on theends of the cover housing) into the left attachment pointor the right attachment point (shown). Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover Insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end of the cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle.
  • 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEGrab the cover handle and pull it toward you. As the WARNING!cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the rear attach-ment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the notches in A cargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle couldthe trim panels. Lower the cover to position the posts into cause injury in a collision. It could become airbornethe bottom of the notches and release the handle. during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mount- ing. Do not store it in the vehicle. REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper/Washer The rear window wiper/washer control is located on the left side of the steering column. Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 Rotate the switch upward past the first detent position to activate the rear washer. The washer pump will continue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release, the wiper will cycle three times before returning to the set position. 3 Rear Wiper/WasherRotate the switch upward to the first detentposition for rear wiper operation. Rear Wiper/Washer Control
  • 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEIf the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned CAUTION! (Continued)to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically returnto the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the • Always remove any buildup of snow that preventswiper will resume function at whichever position the the rear wiper blade from returning to the parkswitch is set at. position. If the rear wiper control is turned off and the blade cannot return to the park position, dam- CAUTION! age to the rear wiper motor may occur. • Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an Rear Window Defroster automatic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may result if the rear wiper switch is left in the on The rear window defroster button is located on position. the climate control panel. Press this button to turn • In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper on the rear window defroster and the heated outside switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will park position before turning off the engine. If the illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap- freezes to the window, damage to the rear wiper proximately 10 minutes. motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. (Continued)
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPEDwindow defroster only when the engine is operating. The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to carry cargo weight. The load must not exceed 150 lbs CAUTION! (68 kg), and it should be distributed uniformly over the Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to cross rails. In addition, the roof rack does not increase the the heating elements: total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the 3 • Use care when washing the inside of the rear total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity. the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth NOTE: Metal crossbars are offered by MOPAR௡ acces- and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the sories. See your authorized dealer. heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. To Move The Cross Rails • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive 1. Loosen the knobs on top of each cross rail approxi- window cleaners on the interior surface of the mately six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the window. side rail. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
  • 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE2. Relocate the cross rails, aligning the cross rail stan- • To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the chions (end pieces) with one of the vertical marks on cross rails are not in use, fasten the front cross rail in the outboard surface of the side rail for proper posi- the fourth position from the front and the rear cross tioning. There are four frontward marks for the front rail in the eighth position. The tie down holes on the cross rail and four rearward marks for the rear cross cross rail ends should always be used to tie down the rail. Make sure the cross rails remain equally spaced or load. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the parallel at any position for proper function. load remains securely attached.3. Tighten the knobs on each cross rail to lock it in position. As you tighten the knob, make sure the CAUTION! clamp tooth engages completely into the side rail slot. • Cross rails should remain equally spaced or paral-4. Attempt to move the cross rail to ensure that it is lel at any luggage rack position for proper function. locked in position. Noncompliance could result in damage to the roof rack, cargo, and vehicle.NOTE: • To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do• To help control wind noise when installing the cross not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of rails, make sure the arrows marked on the underside 150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute loads as evenly as of the cross rails face the front of the vehicle. possible and secure the load appropriately. (Continued)
  • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283 CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING!• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, Cargo must be securely tied before driving your such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the large frontal area should be secured to both the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per- front and rear of the vehicle.• Place a blanket or other protection between the sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack 3 cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack. surface of the roof and the load.• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to loads. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELCONTENTSⅥ INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .288 ▫ Oil Change Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307Ⅵ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 ▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 4Ⅵ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .290 ▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310Ⅵ ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION ▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . . .311 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 ▫ Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 ▫ EVIC White Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 ▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 ▫ EVIC Amber Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Ⅵ Uconnect TOUCH™ SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . .312 ▫ EVIC Red Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 ▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
  • 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 ▫ Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio . . .342 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — ▫ Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . .313 ▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — ▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Uconnect Touch™ System 8.4 Settings . . . . . . .324 ▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .347Ⅵ UCONNECT™ MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — ▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 ▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .349 ▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 ▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 ▫ Single Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 ▫ Unwired௡ Stereo Headphone Lifetime ▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 ▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 ▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1. . . . . .340 Ⅵ iPod௡/USB/MP3 CONTROL — ▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287Ⅵ STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — Ⅵ CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 ▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 ▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 ▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 ▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .372 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 ▫ Rear Automatic Temperature Control ▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 (ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 4 ▫ Rear Blower Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377Ⅵ CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .362 ▫ Rear Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377Ⅵ RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 ▫ Rear Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
  • 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES1 — Side Window Demist Outlet 6 — Switch Bank 11 — Engine Start/Stop Button2 — Air Outlet 7 — Uconnect Touch™ Hard Controls 12 — Hood Release Lever3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — SD Memory Card Slot 13 — Dimmer Controls4 — Uconnect Touch™ System 9 — Power Outlet 14 — Headlight Switch5 — Glove Compartment 10 — CD/DVD Slot
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 4
  • 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)1. Tachometer The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part ofThis gauge measures engine revolutions per minute an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area, monitors engine and automatic transmission con-ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage. trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb2. Air Bag Warning Light does not come on when turning the key from OFF to This light will turn on for four to eight seconds ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after during starting, stays on, or turns on while engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the lightdriving, have the system inspected at an authorized stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. Indealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and willin “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for not require towing.further information.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ CAUTION! Malfunction Indicator Light — If EquippedProlonged driving with the MIL on could cause If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicatordamage to the engine control system. It also could Light” comes on continuously with the engineaffect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is running, a malfunction has been detected inflashing, severe catalytic converter damage and the ESC system. If this light remains on afterpower loss will soon occur. Immediate service is several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been drivenrequired. several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph 4 (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING! to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced NOTE:above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESCoperating conditions. This can cause a fire if you system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.drive slowly or park over flammable substances suchas dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking soundsin death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stopothers. when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
  • 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL5. Turn Signal Indicators 8. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display / Odometer Display The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated. Odometer Display The odometer display shows the totalIf the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven distance the vehicle has been driven.more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer ofcontinuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser thesignals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If yourfor a defective outside light bulb. odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair6. High Beam Indicator technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, This indicator shows that the high beam head- then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for- be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage wasward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you totoward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam. make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/7. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer This indicator will illuminate when the front fog must be reset at zero. lights are on.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for thoseThe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- tires.)tures a driver-interactive display that is located in theinstrument cluster. For further information, refer to As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”. equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when9. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. This indicator will illuminate when the park Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- 4 lights or headlights are turned on. nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to10. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoEquipped reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation hasplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMShas tires of a different size than the size indicated on the low tire pressure telltale.
  • 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELYour vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS CAUTION!malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the originalcombined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures andsystem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for warning have been established for the tire sizeapproximately one minute and then remain continuously equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- tion or sensor damage may result when using re-quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. placement equipment that is not of the same size,When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causetem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can oras intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with aof reasons, including the installation of replacement or TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Always check the 11. Seat Belt Reminder LightTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the RUN, this light will turn on for four to eightreplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, ifto continue to function properly. the driver or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brakeReminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound. booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brakeRefer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-12. Brake Warning Light ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is This light monitors various brake functions, indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on including brake fluid level and parking brake 4 when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has application. If the brake light turns on it may dropped below a specified level. indicate that the parking brake is applied, thatthe brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.the anti-lock brake system reservoir. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharpIf the light remains on when the parking brake has been cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the tions. The vehicle should have service performed, andmaster cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake the brake fluid level checked.hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake sary.System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
  • 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The light also will turn on when the parking brake is WARNING! applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is tion. dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. 13. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) LightVehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake SystemDistribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignitionBrake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS switch is turned to the ON/RUN position andLight. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, itOperation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake systemturning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the is not functioning and that service is required. However,ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap- the conventional brake system will continue to operateproximately two seconds. The light should then turn off normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault isdetected. If the light does not illuminate, have the lightinspected by an authorized dealer.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced 17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equippedas soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle securityignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have alarm is arming, and then will flash slowlythe light inspected by an authorized dealer. until the vehicle is disarmed.14. Speedometer 18. Temperature GaugeIndicates vehicle speed. 4 The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-15. Fuel Door Reminder ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera- vehicle. ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to16. Fuel Gauge exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank whenthe ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
  • 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION! WARNING!Driving with a hot engine cooling system could A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You ordamage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads others could be badly burned by steam or boiling“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealerwith the air conditioner turned off until the pointer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide todrops back into the normal range. If the pointer look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Yourremains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Coolingturn the engine off immediately and call an autho- System Pressure Cap paragraph.rized dealer for service.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful(EVIC) information by pressing the switches mounted on theThe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Radio Infoinstrument cluster. • Fuel Economy • Vehicle Speed 4 • Trip Info • Tire Pressure • Vehicle Information • Warning Message Displays • Turn Menu OFF Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
  • 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELThe system allows the driver to select information by • UP Buttonpressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll up-wheel: ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units) and sub-menus. • DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menus and sub-menus. • SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus or sub-menus. Press and hold EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons the SELECT button for two seconds to reset features.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301• BACK Button messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn- ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall Press the BACK button to scroll back to a into several categories: previous menu or sub-menu. • Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur, this type ofElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) message takes control of the main display area for fiveDisplays seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most ofThe EVIC display consists of three sections: the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the 4 condition that activated it remains active) and can be1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line reviewed from the ЉMessagesЉ main menu item. As long and outside temperature are displayed. as there is a stored message, an ЉiЉ will be displayed in the2. The main display area where the menus and pop up EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this messages are displayed. message type are ЉRight Front Turn Signal Lamp OutЉ and ЉLow Tire PressureЉ.3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom- eter line. • Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until theThe main display area will normally display the main condition that activated the message is cleared. Examplesmenu or the screens of a selected feature of the main of this message type are ЉTurn Signal OnЉ (if a turn signalmenu. The main display area also displays Љpop upЉ is left on) and ЉLights OnЉ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
  • 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Unstored Messages Until RUN When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displaysThese messages deal primarily with the Remote Start the following messages:feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition • Remote start aborted — Door ajaris in the RUN state. Examples of this message type areЉRemote Start Aborted - Door AjarЉ and ЉPress Brake • Remote start aborted — Hood ajarPedal and Push Button to StartЉ. • Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar• Five Second Unstored Messages • Remote start aborted — Fuel lowWhen the appropriate conditions occur, this type ofmessage takes control of the main display area for five • Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Resetseconds and then returns to the previous screen. Ex-amples of this message type are ЉMemory System Un- • Remote start active — Push Start Buttonavailable - Not in ParkЉ and ЉAutomatic High Beams OnЉ. • Vehicle Not in Park • Key Left VehicleThe Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into thewhite telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the • Key Not Detectedmiddle, and red telltales on the left. • Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start • Service Keyless System
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if • Channel # Transmit the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with • Channel # Training either turn signal on) • Channel # Trained• Lamp Out (with vehicle graphic showing which of the 4 turn signals is/are out). • Clearing Channels• Key Battery Low (with a single chime) • Channels Cleared• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more doors open, • Did Not Train 4 with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/ • Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting h]). And Operating”)• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime) • Oil Change Due (with a single chime)• Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure Monitor” in “Starting And Operating”• Service TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” in “Starting And Operating”.
  • 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELEVIC White Indicators • Electronic Speed Control SETThis area will show reconfigurable white caution tell- This light will turn on when the electronictales. These telltales include: speed control is SET. For further information,• Shift Lever Status refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,5,4,3,2,1” are displayedindicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” EVIC Amber Indicatorsindicate the Autostick™ feature has been engaged and This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-the gear selected is displayed. For further information on tales. These telltales include:Autostick™ , refer to “Starting And Operating.” • Low Fuel Light• Electronic Speed Control ON When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal This light will turn on when the electronic (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until speed control is ON. For further information, fuel is added. refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305EVIC Red Indicators Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.telltales include:• Door Ajar • Charging System Light This light will turn on to indicate that one or This light shows the status of the electrical charg- more doors may be ajar. ing system. The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON/RUN and remain on NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on 4 be a single chime. while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential• Liftgate Ajar electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). IfThis indicator will turn when the liftgate is ajar. the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the chargingNOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-chime. rized dealer.• Oil Pressure Warning Light If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle andshut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime willsound for four minutes when this light turns on.
  • 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light • Engine Temperature Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the This light warns of an overheated engine condi- Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap- light will come on when the ignition is first proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge tohave the system checked by an authorized dealer. pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and aIf a problem is detected, the light will come on while the continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowedengine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the to cool.vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over andplaced in the PARK position. The light should turn off. stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,If the light remains lit with the engine running, your shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho- hicle. If the temperature reading does not return torized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is normal, turn the engine off immediately and call forflashing when the engine is running, immediate service is service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What Torequired. You may experience reduced performance, an Do In Emergencies” for more information.elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle mayrequire towing.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307• Transmission Temperature Warning Light WARNING! This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, light turns on, safely pull over and stop the in some circumstances you could cause the fluid tovehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaustrun the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off. components and cause a fire. 4 CAUTION! Oil Change Due Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change severe transmission damage or transmission failure. indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.
  • 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELUnless reset, this message will continue to display each Fuel Economytime you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuelturn off the message temporarily, press and release the Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and pressMENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy func-(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform tions will display in the EVIC:the following procedure: • Average Fuel Economy1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the • Distance To Empty (DTE) ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.) • Miles Per Gallon (MPG)2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times Average Fuel Economy within 10 seconds. Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the “RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the OFF/LOCK position. history information will be erased, and the averaging willNOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you continue from the last fuel average reading before thestart the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset.reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button. NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) 4 estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW Fuel Economy FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.Distance To Empty (DTE) Miles Per Gallon (MPG)Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graphthe fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage indetermined by a weighted average of the instantaneous real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
  • 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELVehicle Speed selected feature to reset individually. The three features can only be reset individually. The following Trip func-Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle tions display in the EVIC:Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press theSELECT button to display the current speed in mph • Trip Aor km/h. Pressing the SELECT button a second time will • Trip Btoggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h. • Elapsed TimeNOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the VehicleSpeed menu will not change the unit of measure in the The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-EVIC. tion:Trip Info Trip APress and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the lastInfo” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the reset.SELECT button. Pressing the SELECT button with ЉTrip Trip BInfoЉ highlighted will cause the EVIC display to showTrip A, Trip B, and Elapsed Time all in one display. If you Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the lastwant to reset one of the three functions you use the UP or reset.DOWN buttons to highlight (select) the feature that youwant to reset. Pressing the SELECT button will cause the
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311Elapsed Time Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “VehicleElapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.ON/RUN position. Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays.To Reset The Display • Coolant TempReset will only occur while a resettable function is beingdisplayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to Displays the actual coolant temperature. 4clear the resettable function. • Oil TemperatureTire PSI Displays the actual oil temperature.Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire • Oil PressurePSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECTbutton to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire Displays the actual oil pressure.pressure value at each corner of the graphic. • Trans Temperature Displays the actual transmission temperature.
  • 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Engine Hours Uconnect TOUCH™ SETTINGSDisplays the number of hours of engine operation. The Uconnect Touch™ system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrumentMessages panel that allows you to access and change the customerPress and release the UP or DOWN button until “Mes- programmable features.sages: XX” displays highlighted in the EVIC. If there is Hard-Keysmore than one message, pressing the SELECT button willdisplay a stored warning message. Press and release the Hard-Keys are located on the left and right side of theUP and DOWN buttons if there is more than one message Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 screen. In addition, there is ato step through the remaining stored messages. If there Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of theare no message, pressing the SELECT button will do Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.nothing. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of theTurn Menu OFF control knob one or more times to select or change aSelect from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Press- setting (i.e., ON, OFF).ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing Soft-Keysany one of the four steering wheel buttons brings themenu back. Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch™ display.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313Customer Programmable Features — UconnectTouch™ 4.3 SettingsIn this mode the Uconnect Touch™ system allows you toaccess programmable features that may be equippedsuch as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors& Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, CompassSettings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setupthrough hard-keys and soft-keys. 4NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at atime. 1 — Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 Settings Hard-Key
  • 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELPress the ЉSettingsЉ hard-key to access the Settings screen, Displayuse the Page Up/Down soft-keys to scroll through the • Brightnessfollowing settings. Touch the desired setting soft key tochange the setting using the description shown on the Touch the Brightness soft-key to change this display.following pages for each setting. When in this display, you may select display brightness with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. • Mode Touch the Mode soft-key to change this display. When in this display, you may select one of the auto display settings. To change Mode status press and release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key, then by touch the arrow back soft-key. • Language Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 Soft-Keys Touch the Language soft-key to change this display. When in this display, you may select one of three
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip • Touch Screen Beepfunctions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch Touch the Touch Screen Beep soft-key to turn on or shutthe English, French (Français) or Spanish (Español) soft- off the sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key to select the language preferred. Then touch the key) is pressed. To change the Touch Screen Beep settingarrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information press and release the ON or OFF soft-key, then touch thewill display in the selected language. arrow back soft-key.• Units Clock 4Touch the Units soft-key to change this display. When in • Set Timethis display, you may switch the EVIC, odometer, andnavigation system (if equipped) between US and Metric Touch the Set Time soft-key to change this display. Whenunits of measure. Touch US or Metric then touch the in this display, you may select the time display settings.arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information To make your selection, touch the Set Time soft-key,will display in the selected units of measure. adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down soft-keys, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr. Then• Voice Response touch the arrow back soft-key when all selections areTouch the Voice Response soft-key to change the Voice complete.Response Length settings. To change the Voice ResponseLength, press and release the Brief or Long soft-key. Thentouch the arrow back soft-key.
  • 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Show Time Status and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound andTouch the Show Time Status soft-key to change this Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park Assist status,display. When in this display, you may turn on or shut off press and release the OFF, Sound Only or Sounds andthe digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Display soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.Time Status setting, press and release the ON or OFF Refer to “ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist” in “Understand-soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function• Sync Time – If Equipped and operating information.Touch the Sync Time soft-key to change this display. • Hill Start Assist — If EquippedWhen in this display, you may have the radio set the time Touch the Hill Start Assist soft-key to change this display.automatically. To change the Sync Time setting, press and When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)release the ON or OFF soft-key. Then touch the arrow system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Controlback soft-key. System” in “Starting And Operating” for system functionSafety / Assistance and operating information. To make your selection, touch• Park Assist the Hill Start Assist soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.Touch the Park Assist soft-key to change this display. TheRear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind thevehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317Lights your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-• Illuminated Approach key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.Touch the Illuminated Approach soft-key to change this • Auto High Beams “SmartBeams™”display. When this feature is selected, the headlights willactivate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when Touch the Auto High Beams soft-key to change thisthe doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry display. When this feature is selected, the high beam(RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach headlights will deactivate automatically under certain 4status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key. Then touch the conditions. To make your selection, touch the Auto Higharrow back soft-key. Beams soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the• Headlights With Wipers arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of YourTouch the Headlights With Wipers soft-key to change this Vehicle” for further information.display. When this feature is selected, and the headlight • Daytime Running Lights – If Availableswitch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turnon approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned Touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key to changeon. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are this display. When this feature is selected, the headlightsturned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make
  • 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELyour selection, touch the Daytime Running Lights soft- feature selected. To make your selection, touch the Flashkey and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back Headlights With Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF.soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.• Steering Directed Lights – If Equipped Doors & LocksTouch the Steering Directed Lights soft-key to change this • Auto Unlock On Exitdisplay. When this feature is selected, the headlights turn Touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft-key to change thisrelative to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To display. When this feature is selected, all doors willmake your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmissionsoft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’sback soft-key. door is opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto• Flash Lights With Lock Unlock On Exit soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.Touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft-key to changethis display. When this feature is selected, the headlights • Flash Lights With Lockwill flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key to change thisRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature display. When this feature is selected, the front and rearmay be selected with or without the sound horn on lock turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- • Remote Door Unlock Orderter. To make your selection, touch the Flash Lights With Touch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft-key to changeLock soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the this display. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Pressarrow back soft-key. is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first• Sound Horn With Remote Start press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1stTouch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key to Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitterchange this display. When this feature is selected, the 4 UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of themake your selection, touch the Sound Horn With Remote doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitterStart soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the UNLOCK button.arrow back soft-key.• Sounds Horn With Lock NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter- N-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed toTouch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft-key to change this Unlock All Doors On 1st Press, all doors will unlock nodisplay. When this feature is selected, the horn will chirp matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle iswhen the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote grasped. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press isKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection, programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock whentouch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft-key and select ON the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, ifor OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
  • 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELUnlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed, Heated Seatstouching the handle more than once will only result in • Auto Heated Seatsthe driver’s door opening. If Unlock Driver Door OnlyOn 1st Press is selected, once the driver door is opened, Touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key to change thisthe interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to display. When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) theunlock all the doors (or use the RKE transmitter). driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key and select ON or• Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go) OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.Touch the Passive Entry soft-key to change this display. Engine Off OptionsThis feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’sdoor(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock • Headlight Off Delayor unlock buttons. To make your selection, touch the Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft-key to change thisPassive Entry soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch display. When this feature is selected, the driver canthe arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321• Engine Off Power Delay Compass SettingsTouch the Engine Off Power Delay soft-key to change this • Variancedisplay. When this feature is selected, the power window Touch the Variance soft-key to change this display. Com-switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone system (if equipped), pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic NorthDVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences,equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, theeither front door will cancel this feature. To change the 4 compass will automatically compensate for the differ-Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the 0 seconds, 45 ences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch thearrow back soft-key.
  • 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of • Calibrationthe instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. ThisLaptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need tomodule is located, and it can cause interference with the manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, thecompass sensor, and it may give false readings. compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft-key and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally. NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc. Compass Variance Map
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323Audio • Speed Adjusted Volume• Equalizer Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft-key to change thisTouch the Equalizer soft-key to change this display. display. This feature increases or decreases volume rela-When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and tive to vehicle speed. To change the Speed AdjustedTreble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – Volume, press the OFF, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch thesetting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale arrow back soft-key.between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back • Surround Sound 4soft-key. Touch the Surround Sound soft-key to change this dis-NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your play. This feature provides simulated surround soundfinger up or down to change the setting as well as press mode. To make your selection, press the Surround Sounddirectly on the desired setting. soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow• Balance / Fade back soft-key.Touch the Balance / Fade soft-key to change this display. Phone / BluetoothWhen in this display, you may adjust the Balance and • Paired DevicesFade settings. This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Touch™ Supplement.
  • 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELSIRIUS Setup Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To• Channel Skip reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group ofchannels that are the most desirable to listen to or to NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription.exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To makeyour selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the Customer Programmable Features — Uconnectchannels you would like to skip. Then touch the arrow Touch™ System 8.4 Settingsback soft-key. Touch the More soft-key, then touch the Settings soft-key• Subscription Info to display the menu setting screen. In this mode theNew vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free Uconnect Touch™ system allows you to access program-limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with mable features that may be equipped such as Display,your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,it will be necessary to access the information on the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation,Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe. Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup.Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub-scription Information screen. NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 Once the setting is complete touch the Back Arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings. Display 4 After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings will be available. • Display Mode Uconnect Touch™ 8.4 Soft-Keys When in this display you may select one of the autoWhen making a selection, touch the soft-key to enter the display settings. To change Mode status, touch anddesired mode. Once in the desired mode touch and release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch therelease the preferred setting until a check-mark appears arrow back soft-key.next to the setting, showing that setting has been se- • Display Brightness With Headlights ONlected. When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
  • 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELsetting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale • Unitsbetween the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,soft-key. odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,When in this display, you may select the brightness with showing that setting has been selected. Touch the backthe headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and – arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scalebetween the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back • Voice Response Lengthsoft-key. When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-• Set Language sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until aWhen in this display, you may select one of threelanguages for all display nomenclature, including the trip check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyfunctions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch to return to the previous menu.the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desiredlanguage soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the • Touchscreen Beeplanguage, showing that setting has been selected. Touch When in this display, you may turn on or shut off thethe back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showingcheck-mark appears next to the setting, showing that that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrowsetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key soft-key to return to the previous menu.to return to the previous menu. Clock• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settingsWhen this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will be available.will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a • Sync Time With GPS 4designated turn within a programmed route. To makeyour selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In When in this display, you may automatically have theCluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touchsetting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-markback arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the• Fuel Saver Display In Cluster previous menu.The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster • Set Time Hoursdisplay, this message can be turned on or off. To makeyour selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key, When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
  • 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELhours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to • Show Time In Status Barreturn to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to When in this display, you may turn on or shut off theclose out of the settings screen. digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time• Set Time Minutes Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing thatWhen in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keySync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To to return to the previous menu.make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjustthe minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key Safety / Assistanceto return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the fol-close out of the settings screen. lowing settings will be available.• Time Format • Park AssistWhen in this display, you may select the time format The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behinddisplay setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE-check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mphshowing that setting has been selected. Touch the back (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park Assist status, touch and release the OFF, Sound Only or
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back • Hill Start Assist — If Equippedsoft-key. Refer to “ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist” in When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys- system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Controltem function and operating information. System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function• ParkView௡ Backup Camera and operating information. To make your selection, touch the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appearsYour vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView௡ Rear next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen 4 Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previousimage of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever menu.the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will bedisplayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a Lightscaution note to “check entire surroundings” across the After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settingstop of the screen. After five seconds, this note will will be available.disappear. The ParkView௡ camera is located on the rearof the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your • Headlight Illumination On Approachselection, touch the ParkView௡ Backup Camera soft-key, When this feature is selected, the headlights will activateuntil a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doorssetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)to return to the previous menu. transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
  • 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELtouch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing thatinterval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyprevious menu. to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/ Smart- Beam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped Of Your Vehicle” for further information.When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is • Daytime Running Lights – If Availablein the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn onThe headlights will also turn off when the wipers are whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until ayour selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey, check-mark appears next to setting, showing that settinguntil a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key tosetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key return to the previous menu.to return to the previous menu. • Steering Directed Lights – If Equipped• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relativeEquipped to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To makeWhen this feature is selected, the high beam headlights your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights softkey,will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. Tomake your selection, touch the Auto High Beams softkey,
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that • Auto Unlock On Exitsetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock whento return to the previous menu. the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the• Flash Headlights With Lock PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto UnlockWhen this feature is selected, the headlights will flash On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next towhen the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch theKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be 4 back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.selected with or without the sound horn on lock featureselected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Head- • Flash Headlight With Locklights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears When this feature is selected, the headlights will flashnext to setting, showing that setting has been selected. when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RemoteTouch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,menu. touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until a check-Doors & Locks mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return toAfter pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following the previous menu.settings will be available.
  • 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Sound Horn With Lock Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK but- ton. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you mustWhen this feature is selected, the horn will sound when press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice tothe remote start is activated. To make your selection, unlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doorstouch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a check- On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on themark appears next to setting, showing that setting has first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return tothe previous menu. NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive• Sound Horn With Remote Start Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver DoorWhen this feature is selected, the horn will sound when 1st Press is programmed, only the driver’s door willthe remote start is activated. To make your selection, unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passivetouch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touchingcheck-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting the handle more than once will only result in the driver’shas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to door opening. If driver door first is selected, once thereturn to the previous menu. driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333• Passive Entry check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toThis feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s return to the previous menu.door(s) without having to press the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make • Auto-On Driver Heated Seat With Vehicle Start — Ifyour selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a Equippedcheck-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat willhas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° Freturn to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N- (4.4° C). To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated 4Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Startsoft-key the following settings will be available. Engine Off Options• Horn With Remote Start After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol- lowing settings will be available.When this feature is selected, the horn will sound whenthe remote start is activated. To make your selection,touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
  • 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Engine Off Power Delay Compass SettingsWhen this feature is selected, the power window After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the follow-switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone system (if equipped), ing settings will be available.DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if • Varianceequipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening Compass Variance is the difference between Magneticeither front door will cancel this feature. To change the North and Geographic North. To compensate for theEngine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45 differences the variance should be set for the zone whereseconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properlyarrow back soft-key. set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass• Headlight Off Delay heading.When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top ofhave the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compassDelay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your module is located, and it can cause interference with thedesired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to compass sensor, and it may give false readings.return to the previous menu.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally. Audio After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings 4 will be available. • Balance/Fade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Compass Variance Map Fade settings.• Perform Compass Calibration • EqualizerTouch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid andcompass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scalecompass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow backCAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also soft-key.
  • 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your • Paired Devicesfinger up or down to change the setting as well as touch This feature shows which phones are paired to thedirectly on the desired setting. Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer• Speed Adjusted Volume to the Uconnect Touch™ Supplement.This feature increases or decreases volume relative to SiriusXM™ Setupvehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the followingtouch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow settings will be available.back soft-key. • Channel Skip• Music Info Cleanup SiriusXM™ can be programmed to designate a group ofThis feature helps organize music files for optimized channels that are the most desirable to listen to or tomusic navigation. To make your selection, touch the exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To makeMusic Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select thepressing the arrow back soft-key. channels you would like to skip followed by pressing thePhone/Bluetooth arrow back soft-key.After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key the follow-ing settings will be available.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337• Subscription Information UCONNECT™ MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — If EquippedNew vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a freelimited time subscription to SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio Getting Startedwith your radio. Following the expiration of the free • Screen located in the overhead console: Unfold theservices, it will be necessary to access the information on overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on thethe Subscription Information screen in order to re- overhead console behind the screen.subscribe. 4Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub-scription Information screen.Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. Toreactivate your service, either call the number listed onthe screen or visit the provider online.NOTE: SiriusXM™ Travel Link is a separate subscrip-tion. Overhead Video Screen
  • 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position, 2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume automatically selects the appropriate mode after the Control knob. disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track.• When the Video Screen are open and a DVD is inserted into the radio, the screen turns on automatically, the 3. Ensure the VES™ Remote Control and the Headphone headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins. switch is on Channel 1. Using The Remote ControlSingle Video Screen 1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate 2. While looking at the video screen, highlight DISC bythe features of the Video Entertainment System (VES)™. either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by• The Remote Control repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER on the Remote Control.• The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped)Play A DVD1. Press the EJECT button on the radio faceplate (Touch- Screen).
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 Play Video Games Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA input jacks located on the back of the center console. Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks) on the rear of the center console enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera, connect video 4 games for display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3 player. 1. Video in (yellow) Select DISC Mode On The VES ScreenNOTE: The VES™ system will retain the last setting 2. Left audio in (white)when turned off. 3. Right audio in (red)
  • 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELWhen connecting an external source to the AUX input, be Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controlssure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™ 1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.jacks: 2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to displayNOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta- the Rear Entertainment Controls.tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of thevehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter 3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch thesection in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more “Power” soft-key.information. 4. Touch the “1” or “2” Source soft-key for the channelEnsure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on desired and touch the “AUX” soft-key.Channel 1. Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While AUsing The Remote Control Video Is Playing On Channel 11. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control. Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2.2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX 1, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER on the Remote Control.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341Using The Remote Control 4. Touch the “1” or “2” Source soft-key for the channel desired and touch the “AUX” soft-key.1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is Important Notes For Single Video Screen System playing then only a small banner will appear on the • VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio bottom of the screen. simultaneously.2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/ • In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight and right side equates to Channel 2. 4 the desired audio source or repeatedly press the MODE button on the remote until the desired audio • If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then source appears on the screen. Channel 2 is for audio only. Selecting a video source (DVD) will not show the video on the screen.Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls • When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key. will display on the screen and the audio could be2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display heard on Channel 1 in the headphones. the Rear Entertainment Controls. • Audio can be heard through the headphones even3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the when the Video Screen is closed. “Power” soft-key.
  • 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELPlay A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio • Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the automatically selects the appropriate mode after the PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis- disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or sion. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking starts playing the first track. brake must be engaged.2. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen- • Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a gers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func- switch is on Channel 1. tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,Using The Remote Control FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off the remote control screen functions.1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control. Using The Remote2. While looking at Screen 1, highlight DISC by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeat- 1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key. edly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER. 2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to displayNOTE: the Rear Entertainment Controls.• The VES™ system will retain the last setting when 3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the turned off. “Power” soft-key.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3434. Touch the “1” or “2” Source soft-key based on the Remote Control channel you want to change and touch the “Disc” softkey. To exit touch the “X” at the top right of the screen.NOTE:• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle 4 must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis- sion. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged.• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a DVD is playing full screen brings up basic control functions for DVD play such as DVD Menu, Seek Remote Control Up/Down, Navigating through the menus, Exit. The basic control functions screen will time out and disap- pear from the screen.
  • 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELControls And Indicators switch is in the Channel 2, position the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone the screen). transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear audio while the screen is closed, press the Power 5. ᭤᭤ – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable button to turn the headphone transmitter on. station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter. In2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is menu modes use to navigate in the menu. pressed, the currently affected channel or channel button is illuminated momentarily. 6. ᭢ / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off. the start of the current or previous audio track or The remote backlighting turns off automatically after video chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the five seconds. menu.4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which 7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD channel is being controlled by the remote control. disc, to select a satellite audio or video channel from When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/ the remote controls the functionality of headphone RANDOM for a CD). Channel 1 (right side of the screen). When the selector
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3458. ᭤ / ሻ (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play. 15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP button to access the display settings (see the display9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play. settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode, the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and press- in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode ing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in is selected and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP the radio. button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output Setup Menu of this manual.) 4 for the selected channel. 16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to return to the previous screen. When navigating a12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s play (᭤) to resume normal play. contents.13. STATUS – Press to display the current status. 17. ᭣᭣ – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast channel. See the Mode Selection section of this rewind through the current audio track or video manual for details on changing modes. chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu. 18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a menu.
  • 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL19. ᭡ / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the next audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.Remote Control StorageThe video screen(s) come with a built in storage compart-ment for the remote control which is accessible when thescreen is opened. To remove the remote, use your indexfinger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do nottry to pull the remote straight down as it will be verydifficult to remove. To return the remote back into itsstorage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the The Remote Control Storagetwo retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back Locking The Remote Controlup into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back All remote control functionality can be disabled as ainto position. parental control feature. 1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3472. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display Replacing The Remote Control Batteries the Rear Entertainment Controls. The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op-3. Touch the “Lock-out” soft-key to lock the remote eration. To replace the batteries: control. Pressing the “Lock-out” soft-key a second • Locate the battery compartment on the back of the time will unlock the remote control. remote, then slide the battery cover downward.NOTE: Remote control lock-out will only apply to the • Replace the batteries, making sure to orient themcurrent ignition cycle. The VES™ will automatically according to the polarity diagram shown. 4remove the lock-out if the ignition is cycled to “OFF”. • Replace the battery compartment cover.
  • 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELHeadphones OperationThe headphones receive two separate channels of audiousing an infrared transmitter from the video screen.If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,verify that the screen is turned on and in the downposition and that the channel is not muted and theheadphone channel selector switch is on the desiredchannel. If audio is still not heard, check that fullycharged batteries are installed in the headphones. 1. Volume Control 2. Power Button 3. Channel Selection Switch 4. Power Indicator
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349Replacing The Headphone Batteries approximately three minutes after the rear video system is turned off.Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries foroperation. To replace the batteries: Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of 1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector the headphones, and then slide the battery cover switch is in the same position as the headphone downward. selector switch.• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them NOTE: 4 according to the polarity diagram shown. • When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is• Replace the battery compartment cover. controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.Controls • When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote isThe headphone power indicator and controls are locatedon the right ear cup. controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before 2. Press the MODE button on the remote control.sound can be heard from the headphones. To conservebattery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
  • 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as a DVD Video), pressing STATUS shows the status as long as you own the Product. on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen. What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified Pressing the MODE button will advance to the next below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such use is defective in workmanship or materials. as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on screen. What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, does not cover any damage or defect that results from use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi- misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than gate to the available modes and press the ENTER by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time button to select the new mode. through normal use, are specifically not covered (replace-5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED BACK button on the remote control. TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT-Unwiredா Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DE-Warranty FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLEWho Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,the initial user or purchaser (ЉyouЉ or ЉyourЉ) of this INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PU-particular Unwired Technology LLC (ЉUnwiredЉ) wireless NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ORheadphone (ЉProductЉ). The warranty is not transferable. NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or You may register your Unwired௡ wireless headphonesconsequential damages, so the above limitation may not online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone atapply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal 1-888-293-3332.rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from System Informationjurisdiction to jurisdiction. Information Mode DisplayWhat Will Unwired௡ Do? Unwired௡, at its option, willrepair or replace any defective Product. Unwired௡ re-serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with 4a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLEWARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUREXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVEPRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR-RANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANYWARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.If you have any questions or comments regarding yourUnwired௡ wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-3332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
  • 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELWhen information mode is active, the current mode Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio forsetting for both audio channels is displayed. In addition Channel 2 has been muted using the remote control’sto the items called out by number, the remaining infor- MUTE button.mation displays the current status of the source (such as 4. Channel 2 Mode — Displays the current source forstation frequency, name, preset or track num- ber, song Channel 2.title, artist name, album name, etc.). 5. Channel 2 ENTER Button Action — When the ENTER1. Channel 1 Mode – Displays the current source for button on the remote control is pressed with the Channel 1. 9INPUT FILE #9 button visible on the screen, the2. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: The audio screen shows a numeric entry keypad which allows only icon is not used on Channel 1, in a single screen you to enter a specific track number on data discs and system. Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the HDD (see Numeric Keypad Menu section of this audio for Channel 1 has been muted using the remote manual). Also, Enter Button Action – “INPUT TRK #” control’s MUTE button. to enter a specific track number on audio discs.3. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: Only in a 6. Remote Locked Out—When the icon is displayed, the single screen system: The audio only icon is displayed remote control functions are disabled. on Channel 2 when Channel 1 is in a video mode. 7. Clock — Displays the time.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3538. Channel 1 Shared Status — When the icon is dis- When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 played, the audio for Channel 1 is also shared with the shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s radio and playing through the cabin speakers. ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency,Numeric Keypad Menu satellite channel, or track number. To enter the desired digit: 1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (᭡, ᭢, ᭤, ᭣) to navigate to the desired digit. 4 2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote con- trol’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these steps until all digits are entered. 3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and press the remote control’s ENTER button. 4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go button and press the remote control’s ENTER button. Numeric Keypad Menu
  • 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELStation List Menu Options MenuWhen listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remotecontrol’s MENU button displays a list of all availablechannels. Navigate this list using the remote control’snavigation buttons (m, .) to find the desired station, pressthe remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that station.To jump through the list more quickly, navigate to thePage Up and Page Down icons on the screen.Disc MenuWhen listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressingthe remote control’s MENU button displays a list of allcommands which control playback of the disc. Using theoptions you can activate or cancel Random play. When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the “Options” soft-key activates the Options Settings menu. From this menu you can adjust Audio, Subtitles, Angle and Title.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355Display Settings Listening To Audio With The Screen ClosedWhen watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc To listen to only audio portion of the channel with thein Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the remote screen closed:control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings • Set the audio to the desired source and channel.menu. These settings control the appearance of the videoon the screen. The factory default settings are already set • Close the video screen.for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these • To change the current audio mode, press the remote 4settings under normal circumstances. control’s MODE button. This will automatically selectTo change the settings, press the remote control’s navi- the next available audio mode without using the Modegation buttons (m, .) to select an item, then press the Select menu.remote control’s navigation buttons (c, b) to change the • When the screen is reopened, the video screen willvalue for the currently selected item. To reset all values automatically turn back on and show the appropriateback to the original settings, select the Default Settings display menu or media.menu option and press the remote control’s ENTERbutton. If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
  • 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELthe remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If DVD Region Codesaudio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries The VES™ DVD player and many DVD discs are codedare installed in the headphones. by geographic region. These region codes must match inDisc Formats order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVDThe VES™ DVD player is capable of playing the follow- disc does not match the region code for the player, theing types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter): disc will not play and will be ejected. DVD Audio Support• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see notes about DVD Region Codes) When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES™ DVD• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only) player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,• Audio Compact Discs (CDs) but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio material is automatically mixed down to two channels, which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If format files you increase the volume level to account for this change• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression) in level, remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another mode.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357Recorded Discs • For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.The VES™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are notrecorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a supported.CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player willalso play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or • The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or re- folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.corded) are not supported. • Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play 4If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may the Video_TS portion of the disc.be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be able to If you are still having trouble writing a disc that isplay some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a playable in the VES™ DVD player, check with the disccompatible format and is playable on other players. To recording software publisher for more information abouthelp avoid playback problems, use the following guide- burning playable discs.lines when recording discs. The recommended method for labeling recordable discs• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker. closed are playable. Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD- disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so DVD player. each track number is unique.
  • 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELCompressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA) • Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVDThe DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1 player will automatically skip the file and begin play-Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files ing the next available file.from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW). • If you are creating your own files, the recommended• The DVD player always uses the file extension to fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is end with the extension Љ.mp3Љ or Љ.MP3Љ and WMA between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also files must always end with the extension Љ.wmaЉ or supported. For both formats, the recommended Љ.WMAЉ. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz. these extensions for any other types of files. • To change the current file, use the remote control’s or• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as DVD player’s ᭡ button to advance to the next file, or artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported. the ᭢ button to return to the start of the current or• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down- previous file. loaded from many online music stores) will not play. • To change the current directory, use the remote con- The DVD player will automatically skip the file and trol’s PROG Up and Down buttons. begin playing the next available file.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359Disc Errors displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shut- down is necessary to protect the optics of the DVDIf the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ЉDisc ErrorЉ player.message is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displaysand the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or Product Agreementincompatible disc format are all potential causes for a This product incorporates copyright protection technol-ЉDisc ErrorЉ message. ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection 4visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and isplayer will attempt to continue playing the disc by intended for home or other limited viewing uses other-skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering orof the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the disassembly is prohibited.beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the Dolby௡ Digital and MLP Lossless Manufacturedfirst track. under license from Dolby Laboratories. ЉDolbyЉ, ЉMLPThe DVD player may shut down during extremely hot LosslessЉ, and the double-D symbol are trademarks ofconditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tempera- Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.ture is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD player Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rightwill display ЉVES High TempЉ and will shut off the VES™ reserved.
  • 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELGeneral Information STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPEDThis system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operationis subject to the following two conditions: The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. The left and right-hand1. This device may not cause harmful interference. controls are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in2. This device must accept any interference received, the center of each switch. Reach behind the steering wheel to access the switches. including interference that may cause undesired op- eration.iPodா/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPEDThis feature allows an iPod௡ or external USB device to beplugged into the USB port.iPod௡ control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod௡and iPhone௡ devices. Some iPod௡ software versions maynot fully support the iPod௡ control features. Please visitApple’s website for software updates.For further information, refer to the Uconnect Touch™User’s Manual. Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361Right-Hand Switch Functions Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD) Operation• Press the top of the switch to increase the volume. • Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next• Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume. track.• Press the button in the center of the switch to change • Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.). the beginning of the current track or to listen to theLeft-Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation beginning of the previous track if it is within one 4 second after the current track begins to play.• Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting. • Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the second track, three times to listen to the third track,• Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next and so forth. listenable station down from the current setting. • Press the button located in the center of the switch to• Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to change to the next preset that you have programmed. the next preset that you have programmed.
  • 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may becomeprecautions: too high.1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- surface. lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) wiping from center to edge. oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- ing the disc. RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in or anti-static sprays. your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated5. Store the disc in its case after playing. by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does Hard-Keysnot satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of theantenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 screen in the center of the instru-turned down or off during mobile phone operation when ment panel. There are also hard-keys located below thenot using Uconnect™ (if equipped). Uconnect Touch™ screen.CLIMATE CONTROLSGeneral Overview 4The air conditioning and heating system is designed tomake you comfortable in all types of weather. Thissystem can be operated through either the AutomaticClimate Controls on the instrument panel or through theUconnect Touch™ system display.When the Uconnect Touch™ system is in different modes(Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and pas-senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top ofthe display. 1 — Uconnect Touch™ System 4.3 Climate Hard-Key
  • 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Temperature Controls — Hard-Keys Automatic Temperature Controls — Hard-Keys
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365Soft-KeysSoft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch™ systemscreen. 4 Uconnect Touch™ System 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Soft-Keys Uconnect Touch™ System 4.3 Manual Temperature Controls — Soft-keys
  • 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELButton Descriptions 4. AUTO Operation Button(Applies To Both Hard-keys And Soft-keys) Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by1. MAX A/C Button adjusting airflow distribution and amount. PerformingPress and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the ATC to switch betweenindicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automaticthis function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Buttonwill turn off. Press and release to change the current airflow setting to2. A/C Button Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-Press and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATCindicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this to switch into manual mode. The blower speed mayfunction again will cause the A/C operation to switch increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the frontinto manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.3. Recirculation ButtonPress and release to change the current setting, theindicator illuminates when ON.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3676. Rear Defrost Button CAUTION! (Continued)Press and release this button to turn on the rear window • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasivedefroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). window cleaners on the interior surface of theAn indicator will illuminate when the rear window window.defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.turns off after 10 minutes. 7. Rear Climate Button CAUTION! 4 Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to controls (if equipped). The indicator will illuminate when the heating elements: the rear climate controls are ON. Performing this function • Use care when washing the inside of the rear again will turn OFF the rear climate controls. window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on 8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the Provides the passenger with independent temperature heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after control. Push the button for warmer temperature set- soaking with warm water. tings. (Continued) NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
  • 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either hard-heys or soft-keysProvides the passenger with independent temperature as follows:control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, theNOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will climate controls will not function during Remote Startautomatically exit Sync. operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)10. SYNC position. Blower control should be left in the “ON” posi- tion to allow the climate control to either warm or cool thePress the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. vehicle.The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature isenabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger Hard-keytemperature setting with the driver temperature setting. The blower speed increases as you turn the controlChanging the passenger temperature setting while in clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blowerSync will automatically exit this feature. speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.11. Blower Control Soft-keyBlower control is used to regulate the amount of air Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower settingforced through the climate system. There are seven and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 36912. Modes NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con- ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets andThe airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air warmer air from the floor outlets.comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are • Floor Modeas follows: Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side• Panel Mode window demister outlets. Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually • Mix Mode 4 adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of Air comes from the floor, defrost and side windowthe center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up demist outlets. This mode works best in cold orand down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. snowy conditions.There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to • Defrost Modeshut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these Air comes from the windshield and side windowoutlets. demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum• Bi-Level Mode temperature settings for best windshield and side win- Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and dow defrosting and defogging. When the defrost mode is floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed selected, the blower level may will increase. through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
  • 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL13. Climate Control OFF Button 16. Temperature Control (Manual Temperature Control Only)Press and release this button to turn the Climate ControlON/OFF. Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the tempera- ture of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmerProvides the driver with independent temperature con- temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the bluetrol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. area indicates cooler temperatures.NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically Climate Control Functionsadjust the passenger temperature setting at the same A/C (Air Conditioning)time. The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioningProvides the driver with independent temperature con- system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings. cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/CNOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically button to turn off the air conditioning and manuallyadjust the passenger temperature setting at the same adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.time.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371NOTE: Recirculation Control• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but When outside air contains smoke, odors, or the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, of the windows. you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. The• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is select Defrost mode and increase blower speed. selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the 4• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle. expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo- NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto- front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the matically if these modes are selected. Attempting to use condenser, reducing air conditioning performance. Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.
  • 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELAutomatic Temperature Control (ATC) 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-ATC Hard-keys are located in the center of the instru- ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing thement panel. system to function automatically.Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch™ systemscreen. NOTE:Automatic Operation • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (9) on the the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel. comfort as quickly as possible.2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas- senger temperature hard or soft control buttons (6, 7, 10, 11). Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Touch™ System Set- a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This tings” in this section of the manual. allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automaticmode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain The operator can also select the direction of the airflowon low until the engine warms up. The blower will by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/Cincrease in speed and transition into Auto mode. operation and Recirculation control can also be manually 4 selected in Manual operation.Manual OperationThe system allows for manual selection of blower speed,air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-trol.
  • 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELRear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —If EquippedThe rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear rightside of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at eachoutboard rear seating position. The system providesheated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidifiedair through the headliner outlets.The rear system temperature control is in the UconnectTouch™ system, located on the instrument panel. Rear Climate Controls 4.3 Screen 1 — Blower Up Soft-Key 5 — Done Soft-Key 2 — Mode Soft-Key 6 — Rear Lock Soft-Key 3 — Temperature Soft-Key 7 — Rear Off Soft-Key 4 — Blower Down Soft-Key
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375 Rear Lock Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock soft-key on the Uconnect Touch™ screen, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display. The rear temperature and air source are controlled from the front Uconnect Touch™ system. Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned 4 off. Rear Climate Controls 8.4 Screen1 — Rear Auto Soft-Key 6 — Blower Up Soft-Key2 — Rear Lock Soft-Key 7 — Mode Soft-Key3 — Front Climate Soft-Key 8 — Blower Down Soft-Key4 — Temperature Up Soft-Key 9 — Rear Off Soft-Key5— Temperature DownSoft-Key
  • 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELThe rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center • Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on theof the vehicle. Uconnect Touch™ screen. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob. • Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs. • ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob counterclockwise to AUTO. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC System will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. Rear ATC Control Features NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature1 - Blower Speed 3 - Rear MODE2 - Rear Temperature 4 - Rear Temperature Lock settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automati- cally adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377Rear Blower Control Rear Temperature ControlThe rear blower control knob can be manually set to off, To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lowerto high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera-volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the Uconnect Touch™ system. CAUTION! When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect Touch™ 4 Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature system , the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the Control System through an intake grille, located in temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead the right side trim panel behind the third row seats. adjustments are ignored. The rear outlets are located in the right side trim Rear Mode Control panel of the 3rd Row seat. Do not block or place Auto Mode objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The electrical system could overload causing • The rear system automatically maintains the correct damage to the blower motor. mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants.
  • 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELHeadliner Mode Operating Tips Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for of these outlets can be individually adjusted to suggested control settings for various weather condi-direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets tions.to one side will shut off the airflow. Summer OperationBi-Level Mode The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant floor outlets. to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethyleneNOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head- Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Yourliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.Floor Mode Winter Operation Air comes from the floor outlets. Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
  • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379Vacation Storage Outside Air IntakeAny time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leavesconditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if theyfresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. Inadequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,of compressor damage when the system is started again. slush, and snow. 4Window Fogging A/C Air FilterInterior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- The climate control system filters outside air containingmoved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot beDefrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” inwindshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win- “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-dow fogging becomes a problem, increase the blower tions.speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mildbut rainy or humid weather.NOTE: Recirculation mode without A/C should not beused for long periods, as fogging may occur.
  • 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELManual Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
  • STARTING AND OPERATINGCONTENTSⅥ STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Ⅵ AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .391 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .393 ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 ▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission – 5 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 ▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission – 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403Ⅵ ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .390
  • 382 STARTING AND OPERATINGⅥ AUTOSTICK௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Ⅵ BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .420Ⅵ ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . . .411 Ⅵ ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .421Ⅵ DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .412 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .421 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .424Ⅵ DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 ▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .424 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .425 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .427Ⅵ POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 ▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 ▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Ⅵ TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .429Ⅵ PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 383 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .433 ▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .434 ▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .445 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .435 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446Ⅵ TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .439 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Ⅵ TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .450 5 ▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Ⅵ TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .451 ▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped . . .443 Ⅵ TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .452 ▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 ▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire ▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .457 And Wheel – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 ▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .444
  • 384 STARTING AND OPERATINGⅥ FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 ▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .469 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 ▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 ▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .463 ▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 ▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Ⅵ ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .472Ⅵ FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 Ⅵ VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 ▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 ▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 ▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .473 ▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 ▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .473
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 385 ▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 ▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483Ⅵ TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Ⅵ RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . .490 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . .481 5
  • 386 STARTING AND OPERATINGSTARTING PROCEDURES Automatic TransmissionBefore starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARKinside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakespresent, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat before shifting into any driving gear.belts. CAUTION! WARNING! Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving ing precautions are not observed: children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- into any forward gear when the engine is above ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned idle speed. not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or near the a complete stop. vehicle, and do not leave the ignition in the in the • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle ACC or RUN position. A child could operate power has come to a complete stop and the engine is at windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. idle speed. (Continued)
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 387 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the CAUTION! (Continued) ENGINE START/STOP button once. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter willKeyless Enter-N-Go™ disengage automatically after 10 seconds. 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to This feature allows the driver to oper- the engine starting, press the button again. ate the ignition switch with the push NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm of a button, as long as the Remote engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the 5 Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ FOBIK is accelerator pedal. in the passenger compartment. To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP ButtonNormal Starting 1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and releaseUsing The ENGINE START/STOP Button the ENGINE START/STOP button.1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
  • 388 STARTING AND OPERATING3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions – With STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the NEUTRAL Position) engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF and START. To change the ignition switch positions position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the without starting the vehicle and use the accessories ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the follow these steps. EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine will remain running. • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position: Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to could roll. change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVICNOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN will display “ACC”),(engine not running) position and the transmission is in • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second timePARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 to change the ignition switch to the RUN positionminutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the (EVIC will display “ON/RUN”),OFF position.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 389• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to WARNING! (Continued) return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC will display “OFF”). • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuelTo ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of could enter the catalytic converter and once thean externally powered electric engine block heater (avail- engine has started, ignite and damage the converterable from your authorized dealer) is recommended. and vehicle. • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, boosterIf Engine Fails To Start cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster 5 battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type WARNING! of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen- throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start cies” for further information. the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury. (Continued)
  • 390 STARTING AND OPERATINGClearing A Flooded Engine After Starting(Using ENGINE START/STOP Button) The idle speed is controlled automatically and it willIf the engine fails to start after you have followed the decrease as the engine warms up.“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold WeatherЉ proce-dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel: ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED1. Press and hold the brake pedal. The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a hold it. grounded, three-wire extension cord.3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one once. hour to have an adequate effect on the engine.The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hoodseconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte-the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 grated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side ofseconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. the vehicle.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 391 WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)Remember to disconnect the engine block heater • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idleelectrical cord could cause electrocution. speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your footAUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION is firmly pressing the brake pedal. NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while CAUTION! shifting out of PARK. 5Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-ing precautions are not observed:• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. (Continued)
  • 392 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the number of reasons. A child or others could be brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly seriously or fatally injured. Children should be forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or into gear when the engine is idling normally and near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition in when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. the in the ACC or RUN position. A child could• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure operate power windows, other controls, or move those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, the vehicle. you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the engine off. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the shift lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. (Continued)
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 393Key Ignition Park Interlock Four-Speed Automatic Transmission – 2.4LThis vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- Enginelock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK The shift lever position display (located in the instrumentbefore the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You mustavoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARKthe transmission in PARK. (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK orThis system also locks the shift lever in PARK whenever NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.the ignition switch is in the OFF position. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a 5Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics areThis vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a newInterlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normalunless the brakes are applied. To move the shift lever out condition, and precision shifts will develop within a fewof PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the hundred miles (kilometers).ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when thepedal must be pressed. accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
  • 394 STARTING AND OPERATINGThe transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick௡ shift positions. Manualshifts can be made using the AutoStick௡ shift control(refer to “AutoStick௡” in this section). Moving the shiftlever to the left or right (-/+) while in the AutoStick௡position (below the Drive position) will manually selectthe transmission gear, and will display the current gear inthe instrument cluster as 4, 3, 2, 1. Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
  • STARTING AND OPERATING 395NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to WARNING!allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.This is especially important when the engine is cold. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for thePARK parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-This range supplements the parking brake by locking the ment and possible injury or damage.transmission. The engine can be started in this range. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and othersNever attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying tomotion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the move the shift lever rearward (with the brake pedalvehicle in this range. released) after you have placed it in PARK. Make 5When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift sure the transmission is in PARK before leavinglever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. the vehicle.When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before (Continued)placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on thetransmission locking mechanism may make it difficult tomove the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhillgrade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
  • 396 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift and turn the engine off. When